001-104 Ducato MY GB

001-104 Ducato MY GB
WELCOME ABOARD
T hank you for selecting Fiat and congratulations on choosing a Ducato. A light commercial vehicle designed to
ensure large load capacity with first class safety and reliability, able to offer great driving comfort and be a real friend
to the environment. The functionality of its every detail, its versatility, engine performance, wealth of equipment
and options, safety systems and totally recyclable components contribute to making Ducato the only light commercial vehicle of its kind.
You will see this for yourself when you sit in your Ducato and take to the road.
And you will realise it later when you discover that thanks to its terrific qualities you have everything you need
to hand, even when you are driving under the worst conditions.
Before you set off, however, you should read this booklet carefully. It is an indispensable guide to all your Ducato’s features and will give you first-class advice for high quality driving. Above all, it will be able to provide you
with valuable tips for your own safety, the vehicle’s well-being and about how to protect the environment.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the Services that Fiat offers its Customers:
• the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity
• the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers.
Enjoy your read, happy driving and let your work become a real pleasure.
In this Owner Handbook you will find all the versions and contents (optional included)
of Fiat Ducato. Take into account only the information regarding the equipment
and version you have purchased.
1
MUST BE READ!
REFUELLING
K
Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) no less than 95.
Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Make sure the handbrake is pulled up; put the gear lever to neutral; press the clutch pedal down to the floor
without touching the accelerator; then:
automatic gearbox: for operation and use, strictly follow instructions and warnings contained at paragraph
“Automatic gearbox” in section “Getting the best out of your vehicle”.
petrol engines: turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts.
diesel engines: turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the instrument panel warning light m and Y
to go out; then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts.
PARKING OVER INFLAMMABLE MATERIAL

2
When functioning normally, the catalytic converter reaches high temperatures. For this reason do not park
the vehicle over inflammable material, grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.: fire hazard.
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
쇵
If, after buying the vehicle, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), visit
a Fiat Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle’s electric
system can support the required load.
CODE card
Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the vehicle. You should always keep the electronic code written on
the CODE card with you in case you need to carry out an emergency start-up procedure.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the vehicle is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.
THE OWNER HANDBOOK CONTAINS…
…information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your vehicle, and its maintenance. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection)
(vehicle
well-being).
3
THE SIGNS TO HELP YOU DRIVE CORRECTLY
The signs you see on this page are very important. They highlight those parts of the handbook where, more than
anywhere else, you should stop for a minute and read carefully.
As you can see, each sign has a different symbol to make it immediately and easy to identify the subjects in the
different areas:
Personal safety.
Important. Total or partial failure to
follow these instructions can place driver, passengers or others in serious
danger.
4
Environmental protection.
This shows you the correct procedures to follow to ensure that the vehicle does not harm the environment.
Vehicle well-being.
Important. Total or partial failure to
follow these instructions will result in
the risk of serious damage to the vehicle and may invalidate the warranty
as well.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DASHBOARD
The presence and the position of the instruments and warning lights may vary according to the vehicle version.
F0D0080m
fig. 1
1 Side air vents - 2 Direction indicators and light stalk - 3 Instrument panel - 4 Windscreen wiper stalk 5 Central air vents - 6 Writing/reading desk - 7 Sound system compartment - 8 Central button panel - 9 Central air vents 10 Oddment trays/passenger’s airbag - 11 Side air vents - 12 Bottle holder - 13 Current socket - 14 Ashtray - 15 Air distribution - 16 Air temperature - 17 Air recirculation - 18 Cigar lighter - 19 Fan control - 20 Gear shift lever - 21 Ignition
switch - 22 Steering wheel adjustment lever - 23 Horn - 24 Airbag - 25 Oddment trays
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5
The presence and the position of the instruments and warning lights may vary according to the vehicle version.
F0D0246m
fig. 2
1 Side air vent - 2 Oddment trays/passenger’s airbag - 3 Central air vents - 4 Central button panel - 5 Sound system compartment - 6 Writing/reading desk - 7 Direction indicators and light stalk - 8 Instrument panel - 9 Windscreen wiper stalk 10 Oddment trays - 11 Ignition switch - 12 Airbag - 13 Horn - 14 Steering wheel adjustment lever - 15 Gear shift lever 16 Air distribution - 17 Current socket - 18 Ashtray - 19 Air temperature - 20 Air recirculation - 21 Cigar lighter - 22 Fan
control - 23 Bottle holder
6
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Special coloured labels have been attached near or actually on some of
the components of your Ducato.
These labels bear symbols that remind
you of the precautions to be taken as
regards that particular component.
THE FIAT CODE
SYSTEM
To further protect your vehicle from
theft, it has been fitted with an engine
immobiliser system (Fiat CODE)
which is automatically activated when
the ignition key is removed.
An electronic device, in fact, is fitted
in each ignition key grip. The device
modulates a signal when the engine is
started through a special aerial built
into the ignition switch. The modulate
signal, which changes each time the
engine is started, is the password by
means of which the control unit
recognises the key and enables to
start the engine.
KEYS fig. 3
The following keys are provided with
the vehicle:
– two keys A with metal insert and
power-assisted opening if the vehicle
is not equipped with remote control;
– key A and key B if the vehicle is fitted with a door lock remote control.
– Key A is the key that is used normally. It will:
– start the engine;
– lock/unlock the front doors;
– lock/unlock the side sliding doors;
– lock/unlock the rear doors;
– lock/unlock the fuel filler cap.
F0D0128m
SYMBOLS
fig. 3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7
The CODE card fig. 4 is also supplied with the keys and it bears the following:
A - the electronic code to be used
for emergency starting (see “Emergency start-up” in the “In an emergency” section);
IMPORTANT In order to ensure
perfect efficiency of the electronic devices contained inside the keys, they
should never be exposed to direct
sunlight.
B - the mechanical key code to be
given to the Fiat Dealership when
ordering duplicate keys.
U.K. Vehicles only
Keep the CODE card in a safe place.
At the behest of the motor Insurance
Companies the CODE card for emergency starting and remplacement of
keys is not provided. If you need assistance please contact your nearest
Fiat Dealership or telephone Free
Phone 0800 717000.
F0D0001m
You should always have the electronic code number written on the
CODE card with you at all times in
case you need to perform an emergency start-up.
fig. 4
8
All the keys and the
CODE card must be
handed over to the new
owner when selling the vehicle.
OPERATION
Each time the ignition key is turned
to STOP, or PARK, the protection
system will automatically immobilise
the engine.
When the key is turned to MAR to
start the engine:
1) If the code is recognised the Y
fig. 5 warning light on the instrument
panel will flash briefly: this means that
the protection system has recognised
the key code and disabled the engine
immobiliser. Turn the key to AVV, to
start.
2) If the Y warning light stays on,
the code was not recognised. In this
case, turn the key to STOP and then
back to MAR. If the engine remains
immobilised, try with the other keys
provided.
F0D0191m
The key B, with a built-in remote
control, has the same functions as key
A in vehicles with door lock/unlock
remote control.
fig. 5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If you are still unable to start the engine, perform the emergency start-up
procedure (see “In an emergency”)
and call your Fiat Dealership.
When the vehicle is travelling and the
key is at MAR:
1) If the Y warning light comes on
while the vehicle is moving, this means
that the system is running a self-test
(e.g. due to a voltage drop).
2) If the Y warning light flashes, the
vehicle is not protected by the engine
immobiliser. Contact a Fiat Dealership immediately and get them to
store the codes of all the keys in the
memory.
IMPORTANT The electronic components inside the key may be damaged if the key is subjected to sharp
knocks.
IMPORTANT Each key provided
with the vehicle has its own code, different from all the others, which must
be stored in the memory of the system control unit.
DUPLICATE KEYS
When additional keys are required,
go to your Fiat Dealership, taking all
the keys in your possession and the
CODE card with you. The Fiat Dealership will store the old and new keys
(up to eight) in the system. The Fiat
Dealership may ask you to demonstrate that you own the vehicle.
The codes of any keys that are not
available when the new storage procedure is carried out will be deleted
from the memory to prevent any lost
or stolen keys being used to start the
engine.
All the keys and the CODE card
must be handed over to the new owner when selling the vehicle.
DOOR LOCK
REMOTE CONTROL
The radio-frequency remote control
is built into the ignition key.
The key fig. 6 includes the following:
– a metal insert A that can be enclosed in the key grip
– a button E for power-assisted
opening of the metal insert
– a button C for remote door unlocking and electronic alarm deactivation (where provided) at the same
time, and timed switching on of the internal ceiling lights;
– a button D for remote door locking and electronic alarm activation
(where provided) at the same time,
and switching off of the internal ceiling
lights;
– led B indicating control sending to
electronic alarm system receiver.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
9
WARNING
IMPORTANT The remote control
system frequency can be disturbed by
significant radio transmissions outside
the car (e.g: mobile phones, HAM radio systems, etc.) that could cause remote control malfunctioning.
For instructions on ordering additional remote controls or replacing
the batteries, refer to the relevant
paragraphs in the following pages. Refer to “Radio-frequency remote control” in section “Technical Specifications” for the relevant ministerial homologation.
MINISTERIAL
HOMOLOGATION
In the respect of the legislation in
force in each country in the matter of
radio-frequency devices, please note
that:
– the market-specific homologation
numbers are listed in paragraph “Radio-frequency remote control” in section “Technical Specifications”.
F0D0130m
When pressing the button
E, take care to prevent the
metal insert from causing harm or
damage when it comes out. The
button E should only be pressed
when the key is away from the
body, in particular from the eyes,
and from objects that can be spoilt
(e.g.: clothes). Make sure the key
can never be touched by others, especially children, who may inadvertently press the button E.
To insert the metal insert in the key
grip, keep the button E pressed and
turn the insert in the direction shown
by the arrow until hearing the click as
it locks into place. Then release the
button E.
fig. 6
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
– the homologation number is printed on the component for markets
where this is required.
REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL
REMOTE CONTROLS
– replace the battery E making sure
that the bias is correct;
ELECTRONIC ALARM
The receiver will acknowledge up to
eight remote controls.
– re-insert the battery holder in the
key and lock it, turning the device C
to ;.
The electronic alarm can be requested only for versions with fixed
panel and has the following functions:
REPLACING THE BATTERIES
If when button (C or D-fig. 6) is
pressed, the key led B-fig. 6 flashes
once only, change the battery with a
new one.
To replace the battery:
– press button A-fig. 7 and move
the metal insert B to the open position;
– remote controlled locking and unlocking of doors;
– perimetral surveillance, detecting
the opening of doors, bonnet, side
door and rear door;
Used batteries pollute
the environment. Dispose
of them in the special
containers as specified by current
legislation or take them to your
nearest Fiat Dealership, which
will deal with their disposal.
F0D0129m
– using a finely-tipped screwdriver,
turn the opening device C to :: and
pull out the battery holder D;
– volumetric surveillance, detecting
intrusions in the cabin only; load compartment does not undergo volumetric surveillance.
fig. 7
F0D0204m
If additional remote control are required or any reasons, go to a Fiat
Dealership, taking all the keys you
own and the CODE card with you.
fig. 8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
11
OPERATION
The electronic alarm fitted on the Fiat Ducato is controlled by the receiver located on the front ceiling light and
is switched on by means of the radiofrequency remote control.
Volumetric protection sensors Cfig. 8 are located in the ceiling light.
The alarm can only be switched on
when the ignition key is removed from
STOP or PARK position.
The electronic alarm control unit includes also the alarm siren that can be
cut out.
To operate an electrical device powered by the ignition key (e.g.: electric
windows), turn the key to MAR, operate the control and turn the key
back to STOP within 30 seconds. In
this way the volumetric surveillance
function will not be reactivated.
To cut out the siren: when switching the electronic alarm on, keep control button C pressed for over 4 seconds and then release it.
F0D0209m
Led A-fig. 9, set on the right side of
the steering column, will blink when
the system is on.
fig. 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The volumetric surveillance function
will be restored (before switching the
electronic alarm on) after the key has
been turned to MAR for at least 30
seconds.
To cut out the volumetric surveillance: you can cut out the volumetric protection function before
switching the electronic alarm on. Proceed as follows: take the key in rapid
sequence from STOP to MAR and
then back to STOP. Then remove the
key.
To switch the electronic alarm
on: press button D-fig. 6 on the remote control briefly. You will hear a
beep and the direction indicators will
flash for approximately three seconds
(only in countries where this is allowed).
12
Led A will light up for approximately two seconds to confirm that the
function has been cut out.
To switch the electronic alarm
off: press the remote control button
C-fig. 6. You will hear two beeps and
the direction indicators will flash twice
(only in countries where this is allowed).
You will hear five beeps to confirm
that the siren is cut out and that the
alarm is on.
SYSTEM SELF-TEST
If the beep is followed after one second by another beep when the electronic alarm is switched on, check
whether the doors, the bonnet and
the load compartment are perfectly
closed. Try to switch the alarm on
again. If the situation persists, contact
a Fiat Dealership.
PROGRAMMING
THE SYSTEM
The electronic alarm will have been
programmed by Fiat Dealership.
Any subsequent programming should
also be carried out by a Fiat Dealership.
If additional remote control is required for any reasons, go to a Fiat
Dealership, taking all the keys you
own and the CODE card with you.
IMPORTANT The electronic
alarm operation is prepared according
to the laws of the specific country.
This operation is only to be carried
out by a Fiat Dealership to avoid
damaging the electronic memory storage system.
WHAT SETS
THE ALARM OFF
The electronic alarm will be set off if:
1) a door, the bonnet or the load
compartment is opened;
2) the battery is disconnected or the
electronic alarm power supply cables
are cut;
3) something moves in the passenger compartment (volumetric surveillance);
4) the key is turned to MAR.
When the alarm is triggered, a siren
will sound for about 26 seconds (for a
maximum of 3 cycles with 5 second
pauses, if the cause of the alarm persists) and the direction indicators will
flash for about 5 minutes (only in the
countries where this is allowed).
Once the alarm situation has been
resolved, the alarm will return to its
normal surveillance function.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
13
To cut off the alarm before this,
press the remote control button; if
this is unsuccessful, turn the emergency key to OFF (see next paragraph
“How to turn the alarm off”)
HOW TO TURN
THE ALARM OFF
If the remote control batteries run
down, or the car alarm system is
faulty, the electronic alarm can be cut
out by using one of the two emergency keys supplied set on the system
deactivation control unit (that is
housed in the fuse box on the right
side of the dashboard).
To do this, open the fuse box, take
off the switch rubber cap, insert the
key and turn it counterclockwise
(OFF position); the system is now deactivated.
To turn the system back on, turn the
key clockwise (ON position).
14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do not leave the key inserted in the
switch. Cover the keyhole with the
rubber cap to prevent dust and water getting in.
7 blinks:
Emergency keys should be left in the
car coupled with the switch.
9 blinks:
10 blinks:
HOW TO KNOW IF THE
ALARM HAS GONE OFF
After deactivating the system, led Afig. 9 will indicate the theft attempt
specifying also the cause of the alarm:
fixed light: remote control battery down
1 blink:
right-hand door
2 blinks:
left-hand door
5 blinks:
volumetric sensors
(indicate a movement
inside the passenger’s
compartment)
6 blinks:
bonnet
8 blinks:
load
compartment
tampering with
ignition switch
alarm wires cut
at least three causes
of alarm.
The led goes off when turning the
key to MAR or after about 2 minutes
blinking.
Since the electronic car
alarm absorbs electricity,
if you will not be using
your car for more than a month,
switch the system off with the remote control and turn the emergency key to OFF.
SEAT BELTS
At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for
a short stretch, then pull it out again
without jerking.
To unfasten the seat belts, press button C. Guide the seat belt with your
hand while it is rewinding, to prevent
it from twisting.
USING THE SEAT BELTS
The belt should be worn keeping the
chest straight and rested against the
seat back.
To fasten the seat belts, take hold the
fastener tongue A-fig. 10 and insert
it into the buckle B, until hearing the
locking click.
The seat belt reel mechanism ensures that the belt automatically adjusts to the wearer allowing him or
her to move in complete freedom.
When the vehicle is parked on a
steep slope the reel mechanism may
block; this is normal. The reel mechanism also prevents the webbing coming out when it is jerked or if the vehicle brakes sharply, is in a collision or
when cornering at high speed.
WARNING
F0D0050m
Never press button C when
travelling.
fig. 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
15
For their use see the following figures:
After using the rear side
seat belts (first row seats),
fasten seat belts into the relevant
catches set aside the seats to prevent obstacles when getting in/out
of the vehicle.
- fig. 11 first row left-hand side seat
The rear seat is fitted with inertial
seat belts with three anchor points
and reel for the side and centre seats
fig. 11.
- fig. 12 first row central seat
- fig. 13 first row right-hand side seat
F0D0262m
F0D0261m
On certain versions, after using seat
belts, insert tongues D into the relevant catches E to prevent obstacles
when getting in/out of the vehicle.
fig. 11
16
WARNING
fig. 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F0D0263m
For rear single seats
(Panorama versions) and
bench seats (Combi versions)
fig. 13
For rear central bench seat,
lap belt without retractor
(Combi versions)
Belt use is shown in fig. 15
WARNING
Remember that in the case
of a violent collision, back
seat passengers not wearing seat
belts also represent a serious danger to the passengers in the front
(Panorama, Combi and CrewCab
versions).
To fasten the seat belt: insert the
fastener tongue A-fig. 14 into the
buckle B until hearing the locking
click.
Side seats are fitted with seat belts
with three anchor points.
To unfasten the seat belts: press
button C.
WARNING
The rear central seat belt
safety action is only guaranteed when the bench seat backrest is tilted backwards completely
(see figure 15a).
To adjust the seat belt: slide the webbing through adjuster D, pulling end E
to shorten it and length F to lengthen it.
F0D0298m
For rear central bench seat,
seat belt with retractor
(Combi versions)
Rear bech seat is fitted with three
point belt and retractor for central
seat.
fig. 14
F0D0291m
F0D 0002m
IMPORTANT The belt is adjusted properly when it fits closely across
the hips.
fig. 15
fig. 15a
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
17
ADJUSTING THE FRONT
SEAT BELT HEIGHT
Always adjust the height of the seat
belt to fit the person wearing it. This
could greatly reduce the risk of injury
in the case of collision.
The belt is adjusted properly when
the webbing passes approximately
halfway between the edge of the
shoulder and the neck.
WARNING
Only adjust seat belt
height when the vehicle is
stationary.
5 different adjustments in height are
provided.
To adjust, press button A-fig. 16 and
raise or lower the grip B-fig. 16.
F0D 0051m
WARNING
fig. 16
18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
After you have made the
adjustment, always make
sure that the loop is attached firmly in one of the preset positions. To
do this, with the button released,
exert a further pressure to allow
the anchoring device to catch if release did not take place at one of
the preset positions.
PRETENSIONERS
Ducato vehicles fitted with airbags
are also fitted with pretensioners to
improve protection.
These devices “feel” that a violent
collision is in progress via a sensor and
pull back a few inches of webbing. In
this way the pretensioners ensure that
the belt is adhering perfectly to the
body before the belt begins to hold
back the wearer.
When the pretensioner has been
triggered the retractor will lock. The
seat belt cannot be drawn back up
even when guiding it manually.
The pretensioner does not require
any maintenance or lubrication. Any
modification of its original state invalidates its efficiency. If, as the result of
exceptional natural occurrences
(floods, sea storms, etc.) the device is
soaked through with water and mud,
it must be replaced.
Operations involving
banging, vibrations or
heating (exceeding 100°C
for a maximum of 6 hours) in the
area around the pretensioner
may trigger or damage the device. Vibrations from rough road
surfaces or accidental jolting
caused by mounting pavements,
etc. do not have any effect on the
pretensioner. If, however, you
need any assistance, go to a Fiat
Dealership.
WARNING
The pretensioner can only
be used once. After a collision that has triggered it, have it replaced at a Fiat Dealership. Pretensioner validity is written on the
plate set on the front left door post
near the hinges (fig. 17). Have pretensioners replaced at a Fiat Dealership as this date approaches.
F0D0264m
IMPORTANT The pretensioner
will give maximum protection when
the seat belt adheres snugly to the
wearer’s chest and hips.
A small amount of smoke may be
produced when the pretensioners are
fired. This smoke is harmless and does
not indicate the principle of a fire.
fig. 17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
19
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
FOR THE USE OF THE SEAT
BELTS
The driver is responsible for respecting and enforcing the local rules
and laws regarding the use of seat
belts.
Always fasten the seat belts before
starting.
WARNING
Under no circumstances
should the components of
seat belts and pretensioners be
tampered with or removed. Any interventions should be carried out by
qualified and authorised personnel.
Always contact a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
The webbing must not be
twisted. The upper section
must pass across the shoulder and
chest diagonally. The lower section
must fit closely across the passenger’s hips and not the abdomen (fig.
18). Do not use clips, fasteners, etc.
to prevent the belt adhering to the
passenger’s body.
WARNING
F0D0003m
For maximum safety, keep
the back of your seat upright, lean back into it and make
sure the seat belt fits closely across
your chest and hips. Always fasten
seat belts, in front and rear seats!
Travelling without seat belts increases the risk of severe and fatal
injury in the event of a crash.
fig. 18
20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
Never travel with a child
sitting on the passenger’s
lap with a single belt to protect
them both (fig. 19). Do not fasten
other objects to the body.
F0D0004m
If the belt has been subjected to heavy stress, for
example after an accident, it should
be changed completely together
with the anchors, anchor fastening
screws and the pretensioners. In
fact, even if the belt has no visible
defects, it could have lost its resilience.
Seat belts must also be worn by expectant mothers: the risk of injury in
the case of accident is much greater for
them and their unborn child too if they
do not have a seat belt on. Of course
they must position the lower part of
the belt very low down so that it passes under the abdomen (fig. 20).
fig. 19
F0D0005m
WARNING
fig. 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
21
HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT
BELTS IN PROPER WORKING
ORDER AT ALL TIMES
1) When wearing the seat belts, always ensure they are not twisted and
are free to wind in and out.
2) Following a serious accident, replace the belt being worn at that time,
even if it does not seem damaged. Always replace the seat belts if pretensioners have been activated.
3) When cleaning the belts, wash
them by hand with water and neutral
soap, rinse them and let them dry in
the shade. Do not use strong detergents, bleach, colouring or any other
chemical substance that could weaken
the fibres.
4) Do not allow the reel mechanisms
to get wet: they are only guaranteed
to work properly if they remain dry.
5) Replace the seat belt when showing significant wear or cut signs.
22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TRANSPORTING
CHILDREN
IN SAFETY
For optimal protection in the event
of a crash, all passengers must be seated and wearing adequate restraint systems.
This is even more important for children.
According to 2003/20/EC Directive,
this prescription is compulsory for all
European Community countries.
Compared with adults, their head is
proportionally larger and heavier than
the rest of the body, while the muscles and bone structure are not completely developed. Therefore, correct
restraint systems are necessary, other then adult seat belts.
The results of research on the best
child restraint systems are contained
in the European Standard ECE-R44.
This Standard enforces the use of restraint systems classified in five groups:
Group 0
- weight 0-10 kg
Group 0+ - weight 0-13 kg
Group 1
weight 9-18 kg
Group 2
weight 15-25 kg
Group 3
weight 22-36 kg
As it may be noted, the groups overlap partly and in fact, in commerce it
is possible to find devices that cover
more than one weight group fig. 21.
All restraint devices must bear the
certification data, together with the
control brand, on a solidly fixed label
which must absolutely never be removed.
Over 1.50 m in height, from the
point of view of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and
wear the seat belts normally.
With passenger’s air bag
active, never place child’s
seats with the cradle facing backwards since the air bag activation
could cause to the child serious injuries, even mortal, regardless of the
seriousness of the crash that triggered it. You are advised to carry
children always with proper restraint systems on the rear seats, as
this is the most protected position
in the case of a crash.
WARNING
SERIOUS DANGER If it is
absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front passenger seat with the cradle
child’s seat facing backwards, the front passenger’s air bag
must be deactivated using the key
switch. In this case it is absolutely
necessary to check the warning
light F (see paragraph “Passenger’s front air bag”) to make sure
that deactivation has actually taken place.
F0D0006m
We recommend using Lineaccessori
Fiat child restraint systems for each
weight group. These systems were
specifically designed and tested for Fiat vehicles.
WARNING
fig. 21
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
23
GROUP 0 and 0+
GROUP 1
Babies up to 13 kg must be carried
facing backwards on a cradle seat,
which, supporting the head, does not
induce stress on the neck in the event
of sharp deceleration.
Children from 9 to 18 kg are to be
seated facing forward in child seats
with front cushion fig. 23. The vehicle seat belt secures both seat and
child.
WARNING
Seats exist which are suitable for covering weight
groups 0 and 1 with a rear connection to the vehicle belts and their
own belts to restrain the child. Due
to their size, they can be dangerous
if installed incorrectly fastened to
the vehicle belts with a cushion.
Carefully follow the instructions for
installation provided with the seat.
The cradle is restrained by the vehicle seat belts, as shown in fig. 22 and
in turn it must restrain the child with
its own belts.
WARNING
WARNING
fig. 22
24
F0D0008m
The figure is only an example. Attain to the instructions for fastening which must be
enclosed with the specific child restraint system you are using.
F0D0007m
The figure is only an example. Attain to the instructions for fastening which must be
enclosed with the specific child restraint system you are using.
fig. 23
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GROUP 2
GROUP 3
Children from 15 to 25 kg can be secured directly with the vehicle seat
belts. The seat has the purpose of positioning the child correctly with respect
to the seat belt so that the diagonal section crosses the child’s chest (never the
child’s throat) and the horizontal section fits snugly on the child’s hips (and
not the child’s abdomen) fig. 24.
For children from 22 kg up to 36 kg
the size of the child’s chest no longer
requires a support to space the child’s
back from the seat back.
Children taller than 1.5 m can wear
seat belts like adults.
WARNING
The fig. 25 shows proper child seat
positioning on the rear seat.
The figure is only an example. Attain to the instructions for fastening which must be
enclosed with the specific child restraint system you are using.
WARNING
fig. 24
F0D0010m
F0D0009m
The figure is only an example. Attain to the instructions for fastening which must be
enclosed with the specific child restraint system you are using.
fig. 25
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
25
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE
Ducato complies with the new EC Directive 2000/3/CE regulating child’s seat assembling on the different vehicle seats according to the table on next page:
PANORAMA VERSION - SHORT AND MEDIUM WHEELBASE
Group
Range of weight
1st and 2nd REAR SEAT ROW
CAB
Single or two
seater
(1 or 2 passengers)
RH side rear
passenger
RH side rear
passenger
Central
passenger
Group 0, 0+
up to 13 kg
U
U
U
U
Group 1
9 - 18 kg
U
U
U
U
Group 2
15 - 25 kg
U
U
U
U
Group 3
22 - 36 kg
U
U
U
U
Group
Range of weight
Two-seater
(1 passenger)
Three-seater
(2 passengers)
Group 0, 0+
up to 13 kg
U
U
Group 1
9 - 18 kg
U
U
Group 2
15 - 25 kg
U
U
Group 3
22 - 36 kg
U
U
COMBI version
Table key:
U
26
= suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard ECE-R44
for the specified “Groups”
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IMPORTANT For foreign markets
(Italy excluded), the cabs of vehicles
for carrying goods are suitable for fitting child restraint systems of the
“Universal” category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the tabulated groups.
IMPORTANT For Italian market
only (foreign countries excluded), the
cabs of vehicle for carrying passengers
(combi and panorama), are suitable for
fitting child restraint systems of the
“Universal” category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the tabulated groups.
Below is a summary of the rules
of safety to be followed for carrying children:
1) The recommended position for
installing child’s seat is on the rear seat,
as it is the most protected in the case
of a crash;
2) In vehicles fitted with passenger
airbag, never place child’s restraint
systems on the front seat.
8) While travelling, do not let the
child sit incorrectly or release the
belts.
3) If the passenger’s airbag is deactivated always check the warning light
F on the instrument panel to make
sure that it has actually been deactivated.
9) Passengers should never carry
children on their laps. No-one, however strong they are, can hold a child
in the event of a crash.
4) Attain to the instructions for fastening the specific child restraint system which you are using. These instructions must be provided by the
manufacturer. Keep the child restraint
system installation instructions with
the vehicle documents and with this
Handbook. Never use a child restraint
system without installation instructions.
5) Always check the seat belt is well
fastened by pulling the webbing.
6) Only one child is to be strapped
to each retaining system.
7) Always check the seat belts do
not fit around the child’s throat.
10) Replace the child restraint system after an accident.
WARNING
With passenger’s air bag
active, never place child’s
seats with the cradle facing backwards since the air bag activation
could cause to the child serious injuries, even mortal, regardless of the
seriousness of the crash that triggered it. You are advised to carry
children always with proper restraint systems on the rear seats, as
this is the most protected position
in the case of a crash.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
27
IGNITION SWITCH
WARNING
If the ignition switch has
been tampered with (e.g.
someone has tried to steal your vehicle), get a Fiat Dealership to make
sure it is still functioning properly
before you start driving again.
The key can be turned to four different positions fig. 26.
STOP: engine off, key can be removed, steering column locked.
MAR: drive position. All electrical
devices can be used.
To engage the lock: remove the ignition key at STOP or PARK, and
turn the steering wheel until it locks.
To release the lock: rock the steering wheel slightly as you turn the ignition key to MAR.
WARNING
AVV: to start the engine.
PARK: engine off, parking lights on,
key can be removed, steering column
locked. To turn the key to PARK,
press button A.
F0D0052m
WARNING
fig. 26
28
STEERING COLUMN LOCK
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When you get out of the
vehicle, always remove the
ignition key. This will prevent anyone from accidentally working the
controls. Remember to apply the
handbrake and, if the vehicle is
faced up on a steep slope engage
the first gear. If it is facing down,
engage the reverse gear. Never
leave children in the vehicle by
themselves.
Never remove the ignition
key while the vehicle is
moving. The steering wheel will automatically lock as soon as you try
to turn it. This also applies when
the vehicle is being towed.
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out whatever aftermarket operation involving steering
system or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of antitheft Device) that could badly affect performance and safety, cause
the lapse of warranty and also result in non-compliance of the car
with homologation requirements.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
A - Engine coolant temperature
gauge
B - Speedometer
C - Rev counter
D - Fuel level gauge
E - Odometer setting and scheduled
servicing
F - Odometer
G - Clock setting.
fig. 27 Left-hand drive version
F0D0147m
fig. 28 Right-hand drive version
F0D0148m
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
29
INSTRUMENTS
If the situation persists
even after the measures
you have taken, turn off
the engine and have the vehicle
seen at a Fiat Dealership.
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE fig. 29
Under normal conditions, the needle
should hover around the middle of the
scale.
If it approaches the red section, it
means that the engine is being overtaxed and you should reduce your demand on it.
Also travelling too slowly when the
outside temperature is very hot can
cause the needle to approach the red
sector. In this case, it is better to stop
and turn the engine off. After a few
moments you can start the engine
again and accelerate slightly.
fig. 30 - left-hand drive versions
fig. 31 - right-hand drive versions.
F0D0149m
REV COUNTER fig. 32
IMPORTANT The electronic system progressively blocks fuel flow to
prevent engine from overrevving. This
will lead to a progressive loss of engine power.
fig. 31
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F0D0151m
F0D0153m
F0D0150m
fig. 30
fig. 29
30
SPEEDOMETER
fig. 32
FUEL LEVEL GAUGE
ODOMETER
When the fuel reserve warning light
A-fig. 33 comes on it means that
there are approximately 8 - 10 litres
of fuel left in the tank.
The following indications are shown
alternately on the display when pressing button E - fig. 34:
– when total kilometres are displayed, press the button for less than
2 seconds (impulse) to have the partial rate (when releasing the button);
fig. 35 - total kilometres
– when trip kilometres are displayed,
press the button for less than 2 seconds (impulse) to have the total rate
(when releasing the button). Press the
button for more than 2 seconds for
zero setting (when releasing the button).
F0D0155m
F0D0152m
fig. 36 - trip kilometres
F0A0011m
Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty: the gaps in fuel delivery
could damage the catalyst.
There is only one switch E-fig. 34 to
zero the partial kilometres and to select the total/partial mileage:
F0A0012m
fig. 35 - total kilometres
fig. 33
fig. 34
fig. 36 - trip kilometres
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
31
ENGINE OIL LEVEL GAUGE
(where provided)
The clock will advance by one unit
each time the button G-fig. 37 is
pressed. Press the button and hold it
down for a few seconds to rapidly advance the time automatically.
F0D0154m
When the clock draws near to the
correct time, release the button and
complete the regulation manually.
fig. 37
fig. 38
F0D0217m
Setting time
The gauge graphically displays the engine oil level between the MIN and
MAX reference points.
To perform measurement ensure
the vehicle is on a flat ground, then
proceed as follows:
1) when the engine is not running,
turn the ignition key to MAR;
2) the word “OIL” will be displayed
for 5 seconds together with six dashes
and five or six boxes showing the correct engine oil level;
Fig. 38 - Correct oil level.
Fig. 39 - Minimum oil level.
Should oil level be at minimum, restore oil level to the correct level as
soon as possible. Anyhow, before topping up, first use the special dipstick
to check the level.
3) If the words “OIL HIGH” fig. 40
are displayed, this means that oil level
is excessive (over maximum level) and
it is therefore necessary to reduce its
level in the sump.
fig. 39
F0D0215m
Clock can always be adjusted (also
with engine off and key removed).
32
F0D0254m
DIGITAL CLOCK fig. 37
fig. 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4) If the engine is started while measurement is being performed, the
gauge will display total or partial km
run and time.
Press button E-fig. 34 to stop measuring; in this case kilometres run and
the time will be displayed.
SERVICE INDICATOR
Scheduled Servicing provides vehicle
servicing every 30.000/20.000/15.000
kilometres or once a year. For Countries / markets where applicable,
Scheduled Servicing provides vehicle
servicing every 18.600 / 12.500 / 9.300
miles (instead of kilometres) or once
a year.
IMPORTANT always follow the
terms indicated in “Scheduled Maintenance Program” in section “Vehicle
Maintenance”.
Service frequency
The service indicator only works
when the engine is not running and the
ignition key is at MAR.
The indicator is planned for 20.000
km yearly; for Countries / markets
where applicable, the indicator is
planned for 12.500 miles. If the vehicle is normally used in different conditions than the preset ones, the service frequency can be changed according to vehicle use (normal or severe) and the type of engine (petrol or
Diesel).
With key at MAR also the service indicator symbol 1-fig. 41 is displayed.
The display will show the following
codes:
Each time the key is turned to MAR,
the system checks the warning light for
about 5 seconds.
CFG 1 - 30.000 km (or 18.600 mi)
and 365 days for normal vehicle use for engines: 2.0
petrol, 2.0 JTD, 2.8 JTD and
2.8 JTD POWER, or for severe use for 2.3 JTD engine.
F0D0255m
This indication will be displayed automatically when turning the ignition
key to MAR, through servicing indicator 1-fig. 43 or 1-fig.44 and through
kilometre indicator 2-fig. 43 or daily
indicator 2-fig. 44 when 2.000 km (or
1.200 mi) or 30 days are left before the
next service operation deadline and it
is proposed again every 200 km (or
200 mi) or every three days.
CFG 2 - 20.000 km (or 12.500 mi)
and 365 days for severe use
for engines: 2.0 petrol, 2.0
JTD, 2.8 JTD and 2.8 JTD
POWER.
CFG 3 - 15.000 km (or 9.300 mi) and
365 days for heavy vehicle
use for all engine types.
fig. 41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
33
Service deadline
To change the service frequency with
the vehicle stationary, turn the ignition
key to MAR and press button Efig. 34 for about 10 seconds: the display will show the wrench symbol and
the message “CFG 1” or “CFG 2” or
“CFG 3” fig. 42. Press briefly button
E to set the required configuration,
then press it again for about 5 seconds
to store the new service frequency;
the display will show again clock and
km or miles.
2.000 km (1.200 mi) before
next service deadline
fig. 43
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The information about scheduled
servicing is provided in kilometres (km
or mi) or days, depending on the deadline appearing the first. Contact Fiat
Dealership who will provide to perform the operations provided by the
scheduled servicing and to reset displaying.
F0D0220m
F0D0219m
When scheduled servicing (coupon)
is approaching forecast deadline (2.000
km or 1.200 mi), turn the ignition key
to MAR, and servicing indicator 1fig. 43 or 1-fig. 44 followed by the
number of kilometres (or miles) 2fig. 43 or the number of days 2fig. 44, before vehicle servicing deadline will flash for 5 seconds on the servicing indicator display.
fig. 42
34
After these 5 seconds, the odometer will return to normal operation
and display 2 will show either the total or partial kilometres or total or
partial miles (according to setting).
F0D0250m
Configuration procedure
fig. 44
IMPORTANT You should contact
a Fiat Dealership as soon as problems arise without waiting for the next
service deadline.
At next startings, wrench 1-fig. 43
will come on with fixed light for 5 seconds and the display will show again
time and km or mi.
WARNING LIGHTS
At next startings, both wrench 1fig. 45 and km (or miles) 2-fig. 45 will
flash for five seconds, then the display
will show again time and km or miles,
where provided.
The warning lights come on in the
following circumstances:
w
This situation will subsist until service
frequency is reset by entering code
“CFG 1” or “CFG 2” or “CFG 3”.
BATTERY NOT
RECHARGING
PROPERLY (red)
When there is a fault in the current
generating system. The light comes on
when you turn the ignition key to
MAR and should go out as soon as
the engine starts.
At zero km (or zero miles)
Turning the ignition key to MAR indicator 1-fig. 41 will flash for 5 seconds with the number of kilometres
or miles (0 km or 0 mi) 2-fig. 45 left
before the next service operation.
A delay in the light going out is acceptable only when the engine is idling.
After these 5 seconds, the odometer will return to normal operation
and display 2 will show either the total or partial kilometres or total or
partial miles.
F0D0222m
Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon
as possible to prevent draining the battery.
fig. 45
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
35
v
LOW ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE (red)
When the engine oil pressure falls below the normal level. The
light comes on when you turn the ignition key to MAR and should go out
as soon as the engine starts.
A delay in the light going out is acceptable when the engine is idling. If
the engine has been taxed heavily, the
light may flash when idling. It should,
however, go out when you accelerate slightly.
WARNING
If the warning light comes
on when the vehicle is running, stop the engine and contact a
Fiat Dealership.
36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
V
ASR (ANTISLIP
REGULATION
SYSTEM) (amber)
Turning the ignition key to MAR,
the warning light turns on, but it
should go off after few seconds.
The warning light flashes when the
system cuts in, to alert the driver that
the system is adapting to the road surface grip conditions.
When the system is turned off with
the specific button, the warning light
comes on without flashing.
When the system is on and an ASR
fault is detected, the warning light
comes on without flashing. Check that
the information is correct by pressing
the button once (in this way, if the
system is working and the ASR is restored, the warning light will go off,
but if there is a system failure, the ASR
will not be restored and the warning
light will stay on).
In this case contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
F
PASSENGER SIDE
AIRBAG
DEACTIVATED
(amber)
When the passenger airbag has been
deactivated by means of the respective key switch.
WARNING
Warning light F indicates
also warning light ¬ failure. This is indicated by intermittent flashing, over 4 seconds, of
warning light F. In this event,
warning light ¬ could be not up to
indicate restraint system failures, if
any. Stop the car and contact Fiat
Dealership to have the system
checked.
EOBD ENGINE
FAILURE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(petrol versions only) (amber)
In normal conditions, the warning
light will come on when the ignition
key is turned to MAR and should go
out as soon as the engine is started.
The initial lighting up shows that the
warning light is working properly.
U
If the warning light either stays on or
comes on while travelling:
1. Fixed light - warning of a fuel
feed/ignition system failure which may
increase emissions in exhaust or cause
possible drops in performance, poor
handling and high consumption.
In such conditions, you can continue driving but you should not tax the
engine and you should moderate the
speed. Prolonged use with the warning light on can cause damage. Contact
a Fiat Dealershipas soon as possible.
The warning light will go out when
the failure disappears. In any case, the
system will store the error.
2. Flashing - warning that the catalyst can be damaged (see “EOBD system” in this chapter).
If the warning light starts flashing, release the accelerator pedal and slow
the engine until the warning light stops
flashing. Continue driving at moderate
speed, preventing the warning light
from coming on again. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible if
the U warning light either does not come on when the
key is turned to MAR or comes
on, with fixed light or flashing
light, when travelling. Warning
light U operation can be checked
by means of special equipment by
traffic agents. Always comply
with the road traffic regulations
in force in the Country where you
are travelling.
U
INJECTION SYSTEM
FAILURE
(diesel versions) (red)
When there is a fault in the injection
system.
The warning light should come on
when the ignition key is turned to
MAR and go out after a few seconds.
The warning light will stay on or come
on when travelling to indicate imperfect
operation of the injection system with
possible loss of performance, poor handling and higher consumption.
In these conditions, you can continue driving but you should avoid demanding efforts from the engine or
high speeds. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
Prolonged use of the vehicle with the
warning light on can cause damage to
the engine, especially in the event of
misfiring. The vehicle can only be driven for a short period of time at low
speeds.
Occasional and brief lighting of the
warning light is meaningless.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
37
t
AUTOMATIC
GEARBOX OIL TOO
HOT (red)
Turning the ignition key to MAR the
warning light shall come on and go off
after about 4 seconds. If the warning
light stays on or comes on when travelling, it indicates that there is a failure
in the gearbox (flashing light) or that
the gearbox oil is too hot (fixed light).
– Fixed light = automatic gearbox
oil max. temperature.
Warning light coming on with fixed
light when travelling indicates that
gearbox oil temperature has reached
the max. set limit; in this case stop the
vehicle, set the gear selector to “N”
or “P” with engine idling, (in this case
engine cooling fans are on), until the
warning light goes off. You can then
continue driving but you should not
tax the engine.
If the warning light comes on again,
stop the vehicle with engine idling and
wait until the warning light goes off.
38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the warning light comes on again
after less than 15 minutes, stop the vehicle, do not switch off the engine but
wait for proper cooling of the engine
/ gearbox unit (both engine cooling
fans off).
n
ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL (red)
(where provided)
When the engine coolant in the radiator drops under the minimum level.
– Flashing light = automatic gearbox failure.
Warning light flashing at starting or
when travelling indicates a fault in the
automatic gearbox.
Engaging the 3rd gear, the automatic control system starts an “emergency programme”.
Switching the engine off and then on
again, the self-test system could exclude the fault and therefore turn off
the warning light.
Failure is however stored and the automatic gearbox shall be checked at
a Fiat Dealership.
u
ENGINE COOLANT
TOO HOT (red)
When the engine coolant
temperature exceeds the maximum
set level.
¬
AIRBAG FAILURE
(red) (where provided)
The warning light comes on when
there is a failure in the system.
x
HANDBRAKE
ENGAGED/LOW
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
(red)
<
SEAT BELTS (red)
(for countries/markets
where applicable)
When the driver’s seat belt is not fastened properly.
In three cases:
1 - when engaging the handbrake
2 - when the brake fluid level drops
under the minimum level
WARNING
If the ¬ warning light does
not turn on when turning
the ignition key to MAR or if it stays
on when travelling, this could indicate a failure in safety retaining systems; under this condition air bags
or pretensioners could not trigger
in the event of collision or, in a restricted number of cases, they could
trigger accidentally. Stop the car
and contact Fiat Dealership to have
the system checked immediately.
3 - with the > warning light to indicate an EBD (electronic brakeforce
distributor) failure.
´
DOORS OPEN (red)
When cab door/doors
is/are not perfectly closed.
The warning light is provided only on
certain versions.
WARNING
If x warning light comes
on when travelling, check
whether the handbrake is on. If the
warning light stays on and the
handbrake is off, stop immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership.
d
FRONT BRAKES
WORN (red)
When the front brake pads
are worn. Have them replaced and
check the rear brake pads too.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
39
Y
FIAT CODE
(amber)
The warning light comes on in three
cases (when the ignition key is at
MAR):
1. One flash - the key code has been
recognised. The engine can be started.
2. Fixed light - the key code has not
been recognised. Follow the emergency procedure to start the engine
(see “In an emergency”).
3. Flashing - the vehicle is not protected by the device. The engine can
however be started.
40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
c
WATER IN DIESEL
FUEL (amber)
(diesel versions)
When there is water in the diesel filter. The light should come on when
the ignition key is turned to MAR and
go out after a few seconds.
The presence of water in
diesel fuel can cause severe damage to the engine fuel feed system. Consequently, you should go to a Fiat
Dealership as soon as the c
warning light comes on to have
the system relieved. Warning
light coming on immediately after refuelling probably indicates
the presence of water in the tank:
turn the engine off and contact a
Fiat Dealership.
ABS (WHEEL
ANTILOCKING
SYSTEM)
FAILURE (amber)
>
The warning light comes on when
there is a failure in the ABS system. In
this case, the normal braking system
continues to work although without
the ABS assistance but you should
have the vehicle seen to at a Fiat
Dealership as soon as possible.
The warning light should come on
when the ignition key is turned to
MAR and should go out after approximately 2 seconds.
WARNING
Vehicles with ABS are fitted
with electronic brakeforce
distributor (EBD). The > and x
warning lights come on at the same
time when the engine is running to
indicate that there is an EBD system failure. In this case violent
braking may be accompanied by
early rear wheel locking with the
possibility of skidding. Drive extremely carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have the system
checked.
WARNING
Warning light > alone,
with the engine running,
normally indicates a fault in the
ABS system only. In this case, the
braking system is still efficient,
though without the anti-locking device. Under these conditions, performance of the EBD system may
be reduced. In this case too, you are
advised to go immediately to the
nearest Fiat Dealership, driving in
such a way to avoid sharp braking
to have the system checked over.
4
REAR FOG LIGHTS
(amber)
When the rear fog lights
are switched on.
m
Ü
CRUISE CONTROL
(green)
When the cruise control is
on (ON button pressed).
GLOW PLUGS
(amber)
(diesel versions)
When the ignition key is turned to
MAR. The light will go out when the
glow plugs reach the prescribed temperature.
DIRECTION
y INDICATORS
(flashing) (green)
When the direction indicator stalk is
operated.
3
OUTSIDE LIGHTS
(green)
When the side/taillights and
dipped beam headlights are switched on.
1
MAIN BEAM
HEADLIGHTS (blue)
When the main beam
headlights are switched on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
41
INDIVIDUAL
SETTINGS
Height adjustment
WARNING
Once you have released the
lever, check that the seat is
firmly locked in the runners by trying to move it back and forth.
Failure to lock the seat in place
could result in the seat moving suddenly and dangerously.
FRONT SEATS
WARNING
Only make adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
To raise the seat: move lever Bfig. 46 (front seat part) or lever D-fig.
47 (rear seat part) upwards and unload
your weight on the seat part to be
raised.
To lower the seat: move lever B
(front seat part) or lever D (rear seat
part) upwards and load your weight on
the seat part to be lowered.
Adjusting the reclining seat back
Turn knob C-fig. 47.
Moving the seat backwards
or forwards
fig. 46
42
F0D0046m
F0D0045m
Lift lever A-fig. 46 and push the seat
backwards or forwards.
fig. 47
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lumbar adjustment
This feature ensures better back support.
To adjust, turn the knob E-fig. 48.
Driver’s seat warming
Press button A-fig. 49 under the driver’s seat (next to handbrake lever) to
turn the seat warming off.
SEAT WITH SHOCK
ABSORBER fig. 50
Setting seat shock
absorbers/weight
This seat features suspension with
mechanical springing system and hydraulic shock absorbers to guarantee
top comfort and safety since the
springing system enables to absorb any
shock due to bad surface roads.
Use the adjusting knob A-fig. 50 to
set the required adjustment according
to your weight, settings range between
40 kg and 130 kg.
This seat is fitted with height-adjustable armrest and head restraint.
fig. 48
F0D0279m
F0D0274m
E
F0D0104m
See previous paragraph “Front seats”
for moving the seat backwards or forwards and for height, seat back, lumbar and armrest adjustment.
fig. 49
fig. 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
43
Driver and passenger's seat can be
fitted with two adjustable armrests
that can be raised or lowered. To
adjust the armrests use the small
wheels A-fig. 51.
PANORAMA VERSIONS
WARNING
Before unfastening the seat
belts and getting out of the
vehicle make sure the outer armrest
(on door side) is completely raised.
Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child, on a
child's seat, on the front seat make
sure the front passenger's air bag
is deactivated, the front passenger's
seat belt is fastened properly and
the armrests are lowered completely to prevent accidental movements.
To reach the third row seats from
the side door, use the second row external seat lever B-fig. 52 and tilt the
seat back forwards.
F0D0676m
Before fastening the front
seat belts make sure the
armrests are set in vertical position
(see paragraph “Seat belts”).
Turn knob A-fig. 52.
Reaching the third row seats
WARNING
WARNING
Adjusting the reclining
passenger’s seat back
fig. 51
44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F0D0076m
SEATS WITH ADJUSTABLE
ARMRESTS
fig. 52
Tilting the central seat back
(2nd - 3rd)
When tipping the central seat backrest, the seat must be completely set
backwards and the head restraint must
be lowered.
Pull lever C-fig. 53 upwards and tilt
the seat back forwards.
REVOLVING SEAT
(Chassis cowl versions with
Airbag, where provided)
It is fitted with three point seat belts
(fig. 55), two adjustable armrests and
height adjustable head restraint (see
paragraph “Head restraints”).
On the back of the central seat backrest there is a rigid surface that can be
used as armrest or table, fitted with
glass/can holders fig. 54.
Use the same lever to set the seat
back to its original position.
WARNING
fig. 53
fig. 54
F0D0277m
F0D0078m
F0D0077m
Only make adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary. More particularly, when revolving the seat make sure the seat
is not interfering with the pulled up
handbrake.
fig. 55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
45
Adjusting the seat back angle
Revolving the seat
WARNING
When travelling, the revolving seats shall always
be set in running direction (i.e.: facing forward).
To rotate the seat proceed as follows:
Use button A-fig. 56.
– lower the seat forward completely;
– set the seat fully backwards;
– set the seat back in straight position;
Height adjustment
– press button B-fig. 56 to rotate
the seat.
Use button C-fig. 56 to raise/lower the seat.
fig. 56
46
fig. 57
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Moving the seat backwards
or forwards
F0D0297m
Lift lever D-fig. 56 and push the seat
backwards or forwards.
F0D0294m
F0D0276m
From the normal position of use the
seat can be turned 30° towards the
door (i.e.: towards the outside of the
vehicle) as shown in fig. 57 and 210°
towards the inside of the vehicle as
shown in fig. 58.
fig. 58
COMBI VERSIONS
Use the small wheel A-fig. 59.
To refit the bench seat, pull it backwards and anchor it to the proper
locking devices. Check that the two
levers B are set in horizontal position
and that the bench seat is anchored
properly, then refit the four seat belt
buckles back in the proper seat housings.
Tilting the bench seat
(last row)
fig. 59
F0D0230m
F0D0278m
To tilt the last row bench seat, remove the four seat belt buckles A-fig.
60 from the seat, lift the two levers B
and tilt the whole bench seat forward
C-fig. 62.
fig. 60
F0D0229m
Adjusting the armrest
fig. 61
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
47
Lift lever A-fig. 62 upwards to tilt
the seat back partly forward (fig. 63).
Then remove the head restraints,
take tongue B-fig. 64 (behind the seat
back), pull the backrest slightly backwards and tilt it completely pushing it
forwards.
F0D0281m
WARNING When travelling make
sure the bench seat back is properly
secured.
WARNING
F0D0282m
Tilting the bench seat (versions
with new coupling system,
where provided) (third row)
Never seat in the 3rd row
with the 2nd row bench
seat tilted (see fig. 67). Never place
objects on the 2nd row bench seat
backrest tilted since in case of collision or sharp braking they could be
projected against passengers and
cause serious injuries. For further information see the instructions specified on the label set under the
bench backrest (fig. 65).
fig. 62
48
fig. 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F0D0292m
F0D0283m
fig. 63
fig. 65
Removing the bench seat
If after tilting, bench seat wrapping
is required, pull the two levers Afig. 66 set under the backrest (as
specified on the plate) and tilt forward
the entire bench seat row (fig. 67).
IMPORTANT The bench seat
(weighing 75 kg) shall be removed by
two people at least.
The bench seat is properly released
when the red mark on label (A) on the
mobile part of the bench seat (fig. 70)
is aligned with the green mark (B) on
the fixed part of the bench seat.
To remove the bench seat, lift and
then pull the two levers A-fig.68 (as
specified on the label). Make sure both
levers B-fig.69 are in “released” position (as specified on the label) (pin C
visible).
F0D0293m
F0D0284m
Wrapping the bench seat
fig. 67
fig. 68
F0D0296m
F0D0286m
fig. 69
F0D0285m
fig. 66
fig. 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
49
When refitting the bench seat, make
sure it is firmly locked by pressing pedal A-fig. 71 (as specified on the label).
Label green mark (A) on the mobile
part of the bench seat shall be aligned
with the green mark (B) on the fixed
part of the bench seat, as shown in fig.
70.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Remember that the head
restraints should be adjusted to support the back of your head
and not your neck. Only if they are
in this position will they be able to
provide effective protection.
Front head restraints are adjustable
in height.
To adjust:
– press button A-fig. 71a and move
the head restraint up or down to the
required position;
– then, release the button and move
again the head restraint up or down to
check whether they are properly
locked in the required position.
To lower it back to its original position: press the release button Afig. 71a and lower the head restraint
until refitting it into its seat on the
backrest.
Removal
fig. 71
50
F0D0184m
F0D0287m
To remove the rear seat head restraints:
fig. 71a
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1) raise the head restraint to the first
click
2) press button A-fig. 71a and then
remove it.
HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE
STEERING WHEEL
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out whatever aftermarket operation involving steering
system or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of antitheft Device) that could badly affect performance and safety, cause
the lapse of warranty and also result in non-compliance of the car
with homologation requirements.
The steering wheel of every version
can be adjusted vertically:
1) Move lever A-fig. 71b to position
1.
2) Adjust the steering wheel.
3) Take the lever back to position 2
to lock the steering wheel.
DRIVING MIRROR
This mirror can be adjusted by means
of lever A-fig. 72.
1 - normal position.
2 - anti-dazzle position.
This mirror is also fitted with a safety
device that releases the mirror in the
event of an impact.
WARNING
fig. 71b
F0D0168m
F0D0040m
Only make adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
fig. 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
51
IMPORTANT Radio aerial (or radio aerial + cellular telephone + GPS)
is built into the passenger’s door mirror.
DOOR MIRRORS
Manual adjustment
Adjust each of the two mirrors
A-fig. 73.
WARNING
Electrical adjustment
The mirrors can only be adjusted
electrically when the key is at MAR.
To adjust the mirror, turn knob Bfig. 74 to one of the following four positions: Í 1 left mirror, È 2 right mirror, Î 3 left wide-angle, Ï 4 right
wide-angle
Once the knob has been positioned,
move it in the direction indicated by
the arrows to adjust the reflecting surface of the selected mirror.
The reflecting surface of
the lower part of the mirror
is parabolic to increase the range.
Consequently, the dimension of the
reflected image is reduced, giving
the impression that the object is
more distant than it is in fact.
fig. 73
52
F0D0041m
F0D0048m
If the mirror makes it
difficult to get through
narrow gaps, fold it from
position 1 to position 2.
fig. 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEATING AND VENTILATION
F0D0185m
fig. 75
A - Windscreen defroster/demister - B - Front side window defroster/demister - C - Directional side vent - D - Directional
central vent - E - Vent under dashboard to convey air to the front footwell.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
53
DIRECTIONAL AND
ADJUSTABLE AIR VENTS
fig. 76 and fig. 77
CONTROLS fig. 78
It is however possible to have an optional heater to be set under the driver’s seat.
Press button A-fig. 79 to switch the
heater on.
Press the button again to switch it
off.
A - Fan knob.
B - Air temperature knob (mixing
hot and cold air).
A - Control for adjusting air flow:
turned to ¥ = vent open
C - Air distribution knob.
turned to ç = vent closed
D - Air recirculation slider to cut off
outside air.
B - control for directing air flow.
The vents can be rotated upwards or
downwards.
F0D0033m
Only one heater is fitted on all versions.
C - fixed side window vent.
fig. 76
54
fig. 77
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F0D00167m
F0D0059m
F0D0058m
fig. 78
fig. 79
Certain versions can be fitted, in addition to the climate control system,
with an optional heater to be set under the last seat row and controlled
by button B-fig. 80. Button A controls the climate control system.
HEATING
Control settings for quick heating.
1) Air temperature knob: pointer in
the red sector.
2) Fan knob: pointer at the required
speed.
3) Air distribution knob pointer at:
Z when the outside temperature is
low or when an increased air flow for
demisting is required
O for normal heating
M for heating the feet and keeping
the face cool (“bi-level” function)
N for warming the feet of the front
passengers
1) Air temperature knob: pointer in
the red sector.
2) Fan knob: pointer at top speed
3) Air distribution knob: pointer at
-.
After demisting, adjust the controls
to keep the windows as clear as possible.
IMPORTANT If the vehicle has a
climate control system, you are recommended to adjust the controls as
described above and press button √
to speed up the demisting process.
F0D0166m
≤ when the outside temperature is
cold to demist the windows
DEMISTING AND/OR
DEFROSTING
THE WINDSCREEN AND
THE FRONT SIDE WINDOWS
Control settings for quick demisting.
fig. 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
55
DEMISTING AND/OR
DEFROSTING THE REAR
WINDOWS
Press button (.
You are advised to switch the button
off as soon as the rear windows are
clear.
VENTILATION
AIR RECIRCULATION
Control settings to obtain the required ventilation.
With the slider at Ò the internal
air is recirculated.
1) Centre and side vents: completely open.
IMPORTANT This function is particularly useful when the outside air
is heavily polluted (in a traffic jam, tunnel, etc.). You are advised against using this function for long periods, however, especially if there are a lot of passengers in the vehicle as it could lead
to the windows misting up.
2) Air temperature knob: pointer in
the blue sector.
3) Air recirculation slider: pointer at
Ú.
4) Fan knob: pointer at the required
speed.
5) Air distribution knob: pointer at
O.
56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
IMPORTANT This function speeds
up the air cooling in summer. It is particularly useful when the outside air
is heavily polluted (in a traffic jam, tunnel, etc.). You are advised against using this function for long periods, however, especially if there are a lot of passengers in the vehicle.
CONTROLS fig. 81
A - Fan knob.
B - Air temperature knob (mixing
hot and cold air).
The Panorama and Combi versions
are equipped with a climate control
system consisting of a main system and
a supplementary system (optional) fig.
82 set on the left-hand wall near the
first row seats.
E - Climate control system on/off
button.
C - Air distribution knob.
fig. 81
F0D0074m
F0D0205m
D - Air recirculation slider to cut off
outside air.
fig. 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
57
Turn knob fig. 83 under the roof to
turn the supplementary climate control
system on. It will only work when the
main system is running.
AIR CONDITIONING
(COOLING)
Air flow is distributed to the back
through the directional vents set under
the roof by lever A-fig. 84.
1) air temperature knob: pointer at
the blue sector
2) climate control system: press button √
3) air recirculation slider: at Ò
4) air distribution knob: pointer at O
5) fan knob: pointer at the required
speed.
To reduce the cooling effect: position the slider at Ú, to increase the
temperature and decrease the fan
speed.
Control settings for quick cooling:
Like for Panorama and Combi, also the
Van versions can be equipped with an
optional climate control system to be set
in the load compartment and to be
switched on using the relevant console
controls.
Do not switch the climate control
system on for heating and ventilation.
Use the ordinary heating and ventilation system (see previous section).
IMPORTANT The climate control
system is very useful for clearing the
windows rapidly because it dries the
air. Simply set the controls for demisting and turn the climate control system on with button √.
ADDITIONAL HEATER
fig. 83
58
F0D0075m
F0D0049m
Certain versions feature, under the
driver’s seat, an additional heater using the same heating system controls.
fig. 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LOOKING AFTER THE
SYSTEM
During the winter, the climate control system must be turned on at least
once a month for about ten minutes.
Before summer, have the system
checked at a Fiat Dealership.
SELF-STANDING SUPPLEMENTARY
HEATER (where provided)
The vehicle can be equipped, upon request, with two different self-standing
heaters: one is totally automatic
whereas the other is programmable.
PROGRAMMABLE VERSION
AUTOMATIC VERSION
– heat the passenger compartment
when the engine is off;
The supplementary heater is totally independent from the engine.
This heater is switched on automatically (if required) when turning the ignition key to MAR.
The system is filled with
R134a refrigerant which
will not pollute the environment in the event of leakage.
Under no circumstances should
R12 fluid be used as it is incompatible with the system components and contains CFC.
The supplementary heater is totally
independent from the engine and can
be used to:
– defrost the windows;
– heat the engine coolant and consequently the engine before starting.
The system consists of:
– a diesel burner to heat coolant with
exhaust fume muffler;
WARNING
The heater burns fuel in the
same way as the engine,
though, of course, to a lesser degree
and therefore to avoid intoxication
and suffocation, never use the supplementary heater in closed areas,
garages or workshops not equipped
with specific exhaust evacuation
devices even for short periods of
time.
– a metering pump connected to the
vehicle fuel pipes to feed the burner;
– a heat exchanger connected to the
engine cooling system pipes;
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
59
– a control unit connected to the
heater/ventilation unit for automatic
operation;
In cold weather, the supplementary
heater automatically warms and circulates constant temperature fluid in
the engine cooling system for the time
required to ensure optimal engine ignition and cab temperature conditions.
– an electronic control unit to check
and adjusted the integrated heater
burner;
The heater can be started automatically (programmed by means of the
digital timer) or manually by pressing
the “heat now” button on the timer.
– a digital timer A-fig. 85 to start the
heater manually or to program staring
time.
F0D0165m
When the heater is turned on (automatically or manually), the electronic
control unit operates the fluid circulation pump and safely ignites the burner.
fig. 85
60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The electronic control unit also controls the circulation pump delivery in
order to reduce initial heating time.
When the fluid reaches a temperature
of 30°C, the control unit operates the
passenger compartment ventilation
fan.
When the fluid temperature reaches
72°C, the electronic control unit reduces the burner power and stops operation when it reaches 76.5°C. The
timer, circulation pump and heater fan
are kept running. When the fluid temperature drops under 71°C the control unit automatically turns the burner back on.
The heater can turn itself off after engine ignition or if the flame goes out.
In this case, turn the heater off manually and attempt to turn it back on
again. If you cannot turn the heater on,
contact a Fiat Dealership.
Turning the heater on
Before turning the heater on check
that:
– the heating/ventilation unit knob is
turned to “warm air”;
– the heating/ventilation fan speed
knob is at position “2”.
Digital timer fig. 86
1) Heater cycle warning light
2) Display light
3) Clock pre-set recall number
4) Clock button
5) Hour forward button
6) Program selection button
7) Hour back button
8) Heat now button
9) Display/adjust time warning light
F0D0133m
IMPORTANT The heater is
equipped with a thermal switch which
cuts off the heater in the event of
overheating caused by low or leaking
coolant. In this case, press the program selection button to start the
heater again after repairing the cooling system fault and/or topping up the
fluid.
fig. 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
61
“Heat now” function fig. 87
Setting the clock
Programmed heating fig. 89
To turn the heater on manually,
press timer button 8. The display and
warning light 1 will stay on while the
heater is in use.
– Press button 4: display and warning light 9-fig. 88 will light up.
Heater ignition can be delayed from
1 minute to 24 hours. Three different
times can be programmed but only
one will be used.
Programming the heater
Keeping button 5 or 7 pressed will
fast forward or backward the clock.
– Within 10 seconds, press button 5
or 7 to select the correct time.
– press button 6: either symbol 10
or the previously programmed time
and number 3 (corresponding to the
preset function recalled) will light up
for 10 seconds;
Reading the clock fig. 88
fig. 87
62
F0D0134m
F0D0132m
To read the clock, press button 4:
current time will be displayed for approximately 10 seconds. Warning light
9 will come on.
fig. 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F0D0136m
Before programming the heater, set
the clock.
To program starting time:
fig. 89
IMPORTANT To recall other preset times, press button 6 within 10
seconds.
– press button 5 or 7 to select the
starting time required within 10 seconds.
IMPORTANT Starting time disappears and the number 3 (corresponding to the selected preset time) appears on the display to confirm the
starting time has been entered.
Recalling a pre-set time fig. 90
Turning the heater off
Press the button 6 repeatedly until
the required preset starting time appears on the display (number 3). After
10 seconds, the time will disappear,
number 3 and the display will light up
thus confirming starting time has been
entered.
According to the operation mode
(automatic or manual), the heater can
be turned off:
IMPORTANT To change or delete
pre-set times, follow the instructions
in the paragraphs above.
– manually by pressing the “heat
now” button on the timer.
– automatically, after the preset
period of time (60 minutes when the
display light is red);
In each case, the heater warning light,
the display and the passenger compartment fan will be turned off and the
heater flame will be blown out.
Deleting a programmed
starting time fig. 89
The coolant circulation pump will
run for approximately two minutes after the heater has been turned off to
dispose of as much heat as possible.
During this phase the heater can, however, be turned on.
F0D0135m
To delete the programmed starting
time, press button 6 briefly: the display light will go off and number 3 corresponding to the selected preset
time will disappear.
fig. 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
63
WARNING
The heater burns fuel in the
same way as the engine,
though, of course, to a lesser degree
and therefore to avoid intoxication
and suffocation, never use the supplementary heater in closed areas,
garages or workshops not equipped
with specific exhaust evacuation
devices even for short periods of
time.
– Always remember to turn the
heater off when refuelling or standing
in service stations to avoid fires and
explosions.
– Do not park the vehicle over inflammable material such as paper, dry
grass or leaves: fire risk!
– The temperature near the heater
must never exceed 120°C (e.g. during
painting operations in a workshop
oven). Higher temperatures could
damage the electronic control unit
components.
– When the engine is off, the heater
runs off the battery: it is consequently
important to run the engine for a certain period of time in order to restore
the battery charge.
64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
– Follow the prescriptions in “Vehicle maintenance” section at paragraph
“Engine coolant level” to check the
coolant level. The coolant in the circuit must contain at least 10% antifreeze fluid.
– Maintenance and repairs must always be carried out by a Fiat Dealership and only genuine spare parts
must be used.
MAINTENANCE
Have the heater checked at a Fiat
Dealership periodically (always before winter). This will ensure safe and
cheap running and long appliance life.
LEFT-HAND STALK
The left-hand stalk operates most of
the external lights.
Side/taillights fig. 91
Main beam headlights fig. 93
Turn the ring from å to 6 to switch
the lights on. Instrument panel warning light 3 will come on.
Push the stalk from position 2 towards the dashboard to switch the
headlights on.
Dipped beam headlights fig. 92
Instrument panel warning light 1
will come on.
Turn the ring from 6 to 2.
The external lights can only be
switched on when the ignition key is
at MAR. The instrument panel and
the heating/ventilation (or climate control system) controls and the cigar
lighter ring will come on with the external lights.
IMPORTANT The dipped beam
headlights will automatically be
switched off when the main beam
headlights are switched on if the front
fog lights are on.
IMPORTANT The dipped beam
headlights will be automatically
switched off when the main beam
headlights are on and the front fog
lights are switched on.
F0D0014m
F0D0013m
fig. 91
Pull the stalk towards the steering
wheel to switch the lights off.
fig. 92
F0D0015m
STEERING COLUMN
STALKS
fig. 93
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
65
Direction indicators fig. 95
Pull the stalk towards the steering
wheel (temporary position) to flash
the lights.
RIGHT-HAND STALK
Move the stalk as follows:
Windscreen wiper/washer
fig. 96
upwards - to turn the right-hand indicators on
The device will only work when the
ignition key is at MAR.
downwards - to turn the left-hand indicators on.
Instrument panel warning light RE
will flash.
66
1 - flick wipe;
If you wish to signal a lane change
where only a slight movement of the
steering wheel is required, move the
stalk up or down without pushing it far
enough to make it click. The stalk will
return to the neutral position as soon
as it is released.
3 - fast continuous wipe;
2 - slow continuous wipe;
4 - temporary: when released the
stalk returns to position 0 and automatically switches the windscreen
wiper off.
F0D0017m
fig. 95
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
0 - windscreen wiper off;
The direction indicators will automatically be switched off when the vehicle is straightened out.
F0D0016m
fig. 94
Positions
F0D0018m
Flashing the headlights fig. 94
fig. 96
REARVIEW
CAMERA
Pull the stalk towards the steering
wheel to send a jet of fluid to the
windscreen and operate the wiper
with a simple gesture. The windscreen
wiper will be operated automatically
by holding the washer stalk for longer
than half a second.
The parking system fig. 99 detects
and informs the driver about the presence of obstacles in the rear part of
the vehicle.
Vehicles equipped with CONNECT
NAV+ can be fitted with an optional
rearview camera. This camera fig. 98,
set on roof rear cross member displays on the CONNECT NAV+ monitor the images of the rear part of the
vehicle, thus supporting the driver
during parking or reverse manoeuvres.
When the reverse gear is engaged, the
camera is automatically activated. In
the same way, the camera is deactivated when disengaging the reverse
gear.
F0D0020m
Operate the control repeatedly and
rapidly (for less than half a second) to
spray the windscreen several times
without operating the windscreen
wiper.
It is a valid support to identify fences,
walls, posts, vases with plants and the
like or children playing behind the vehicle.
F0D0173m
The windscreen wiper will flick three
times after the lever is released.
fig. 97
PARKING SENSORS
fig. 98
F0D0223m
SMART WASH fig. 97
fig. 99
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
67
A special horn warns any people near
the vehicle that the driver is manoeuvring it.
Through four sensors located in the
bumper, the system detects the distance between the vehicle and possible obstacles; the driver is warned by
an intermittent acoustic signal with increasing frequency, which is automatically activated when the reverse gear
is engaged.
CRUISE CONTROL
GENERAL FEATURES
The cruise control, with electronic
control, allows driving the vehicle at
a desired speed, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. This allows reducing the driving fatigue on motorways,
especially during long journeys, because the memorised speed is automatically maintained.
WARNING
The Cruise Control must be
activated only when the
traffic and the path allow keeping,
for a distance long enough, a constant speed in complete safety.
68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IMPORTANT The cruise control
can be engaged only with speeds higher than 40 km/h.
The device is automatically disconnected in one of the following cases:
– pressing the brake pedal;
– pressing the clutch pedal;
– inadvertently moving the automatic gearbox selector to N.
WARNING
Never set gear selector to
N (vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox) when the vehicle
is moving.
CONTROLS fig. 100
The cruise control is controlled by
a set of controls located on the steering wheel.
1) ON device on
2) OFF device off
3) RES to reset the memorised
speed
4) + to store and to keep the vehicle
speed or to increase the speed memorised
5) – to lower the speed memorised.
IMPORTANT In the case of need
(when overtaking for instance) acceleration is possible simply pressing the
accelerator pedal; later, releasing the
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed memorised previously.
Press button ON and take the vehicle to the required speed normally.
Press button + for at least three seconds, then release it. The vehicle
speed is memorised and it is therefore
possible to release the accelerator
pedal.
To reset the memorised speed
The vehicle will carry on its ride at
the constant memorised speed until
one of the following condition occurs:
If the device has been disengaged for
example pressing the brake or clutch
pedal, the memorised speed can be reset as follows:
– accelerate gradually until reaching
a speed approaching the one memorised;
– engage the gear selected at the
time of speed memorising (4th or 5th
speed);
– press button RES.
– pressing the brake pedal;
– pressing the clutch pedal;
– inadvertently moving the automatic gearbox selector to N.
F0D0160m
IMPORTANT Pressing button
OFF or turning the key to STOP,
the memorised speed is cancelled and
the system disengaged.
To memorise the speed
fig. 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
69
To increase the memorised
speed
To set to zero the memorised
speed
The speed memorised can be increased in two ways:
1 - pressing the accelerator and then
memorising the new speed reached
(pressing button + for more than
three seconds);
2 - pressing briefly button +: each
pressing will correspond to a slight increase in speed (about 2.5 km/h) while
pressing continuously will correspond
to a continuous speed increase. Releasing the button the new speed will
be memorised automatically.
The memorised speed is automatically reset:
To reduce the memorised
speed
The speed memorised can be reduced in two ways:
1 - disengaging the device (for instance pressing the brake pedal) and
then memorising the new speed
(pressing button + for more than
three seconds);
2 - pressing button – until reaching
the new speed which will be memorised automatically.
70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do not engage the device in town or
in busy flowing traffic conditions.
– turning the engine off;
– pressing button OFF.
WARNING
When travelling with the
cruise control on, do not
move the gearshift lever to neutral
and to not move the automatic
gearbox selector to N. We suggest
to engage the cruise control only
when the traffic and road conditions allow doing it in complete
safety and so: straight and dry
roads, freeways or motorways,
smooth flowing traffic and even asphalt.
WARNING
The cruise control can be engaged only with speeds higher than 40 km/h. The device may only be engaged in 4th or 5th gear, depending on the speed of the vehicle.
On vehicles with electronic automatic gearbox it can only be engaged
with selector to D, in automatic mode
without then moving the selector
manually, or with 3rd or 4th gear in sequential operation. Travelling downhill with the device engaged, the vehicle speed may increase more than
the memorised one, due to the
change in the engine load.
CEILING LIGHT
In the event of defective
device operation or unsuccessful operation, press button
OFF and contact the Fiat Dealership after checking the protection
fuse well-being. Deactivate the device when you are not using it to
prevent accidental speed memorisation.
CONTROLS
The lights come on automatically
when a front door is opened.
CENTRAL BUTTON PANEL
fig. 103
A - Heated rear window on/off
(where provided)
When the heated rear window is
switched on, also the door mirror defrosting function is activated. It is however possible to activate the defrosting function without switching on the
heated rear window: the control button is the same.
B - Front fog lights on/off
C - Hazard lights on/off
Press button A-fig. 101 to switch
both lights on with the doors closed
or open.
Press button C to light the right lamp
only. Press button B to light the left
lamp only.
fig. 101
F0D0038m
F0D0037m
A second ceiling light can be found
over the rear door in the load compartment. Press the short side of the
plastic lens as shown in fig. 102 to
switch this light on.
fig. 102
F0D0032m
WARNING
fig. 103
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
71
All direction indicators will flash and
the instrument panel warning lights r
and y come on when the button is
pressed regardless of the ignition key
position.
LEFT-HAND BUTTON
PANEL
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
This a safety cut-off switch located in
the engine compartment on the dashboard bulkhead fig. 105 which comes
into operation in the case of an accident to block the supply of fuel thereby stopping the engine.
Button panel in fig. 104 is used on
Minibus, Ambulance and 4WD versions for adding special optional equipment.
WARNING
The use of hazard lights is
governed by the Highway
Code of the country you are in.
Keep to the rules.
WARNING
If, after an accident, you
can smell petrol or see that
the fuel feed system is leaking, to
avoid the risk of fire, do not reset
the switch.
D - Rear fog lights on/off.
fig. 104
72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F0D105m
F0D00164m
E - ASR system (Antislip Regulation)
on/off.
fig. 105
Vehicle is equipped with a battery cut
out, fitted into the control unit (CBA)
located over the battery positive pole,
operating in concurrence with inertial
switch intervention and providing to
cut out starter motor power supply.
If you cannot see any fuel leaks and
the vehicle is in a fit state to continue
its journey, press button A-fig. 105
to reactivate the fuel supply system, as
illustrated.
GLOVE COMPARTMENT/
ODDMENT TRAY
The right-hand side of the dashboard
is fitted with oddment trays of different size fig. 108 designed to contain
documents, papers or small objects.
If the vehicle can restart after the accident, the battery cut out button, yellow colour, must be on to allow starting.
Remember to turn the ignition key
to STOP to prevent running the battery down.
According to versions, the glove
compartment lid can be fitted with a
lock openable with the vehicle key.
F0D0653m
To connect battery cut out again,
with ignition key off, remove cover Bfig. 106 and push the yellow button
C-fig. 107 on the positive pole of the
battery.
F0D0652m
fig. 106
INTERIOR
EQUIPMENT
BATTERY CUT OUT
fig. 107
F0D0062m
Inspect the vehicle carefully to make
sure there is no fuel leak in the engine compartment, under the vehicle
or near the fuel tank.
fig. 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
73
The central dashboard is fitted with
bottle holder fig. 109.
In versions with three seats in the cab,
a grid container for small objects or papers can be found under the passenger’s bench seat fig. 110.
IMPORTANT Never use the writing desk in vertical position when travelling.
In the cab, with double passenger
seat it is possible to have a special
desk.
Pockets and an additional bottle
holder can be found on the door panels.
It is contained in the upper part of
the central seat backrest; to tilt it
move band A - fig. 112 and pull the
backrest forwards.
F0D0054m
WRITING/READING DESK
In the middle of the dashboard,
above the sound system compartment, is fitted a mobile writing desk
A-fig. 111 that can be used as a reading desk by lifting the rear part and
then resting the proper support on
the dashboard B.
Clip B is to be used to hold sheets/
papers.
fig. 110
74
fig. 111
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F0D0225m
F0D0055m
F0D0079m
fig. 109
fig. 112
OBJECT HOLDER/
FOOD BOX
When tilted, the box cover becomes
a writing/reading desk with a clip to
hold sheets/papers, similar to that
shown in fig. 112.
A special (optional) box can be found
in the cab between the driver’s seat
and the passenger’s single seat, available in two models: object box or
food box fig. 113.
Refrigerator version (food box)
Object holder version
F0D0249m
In the object holder version, the box
has an internal space of about 12 litres
capacity suitable to contain a medium
size portable PC. On the outside it has
a document holder pocket, a bottle
holder (for one and a half litre plastic
bottles) and a can or glass holder slot.
In the refrigerator version, the box
has an internal space of about 12 litres
capacity that can contain 2 one and a
half litre bottles. In this version the
box is insulated and it is fitted with an
electric device to warm up or cool the
box interior as required.
This box can be used as food container. Food shall be suitably packed
to avoid direct contact with the inner
walls of the box.
When used for cooling, a temperature difference of approx. 18 °C can
be achieved between the temperature
inside the box and that of the passenger compartment after a certain time
of operation (with insulated cover and
plug closed). The lowest possible temperature that can be reached in any
case is not lower than 8 -10 °C.
To prevent the risk of running the battery down, the system is connected via
the ignition key; as a result the box will
only work when the engine is running.
You should remove perishables from
the box if you leave the vehicle parked
for longer than two hours.
For proper operation it is necessary
that ventilation grids (outside the box
and on one of the inside walls) should
not be clogged.
Turn the switch to:
1 = to warm (red led on);
2 = to cool (green led on).
fig. 113
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
75
Do not use current sockets for accessories with power over 180 W
(max. intake 15 A).
The vehicle is fitted with current
socket A-fig. 114 on the dashboard
(beside the central oddment tray) and
current socket B (only on vans) on
rear door right post.
SPECIAL VEHICLE SETUP
SOCKET
Do not use the sockets
for accessories with power over the max. specified
Panorama versions have the current
socket located near the door post opposite to the side sliding door (Cfig. 115).
Under the foot board there is a special connector (fig. 116) that can be
used by those companies that modify
vehicles to connect an additional battery for specific equipment such as ambulances, mobile offices, etc.
one.
Current sockets are both powered
when the ignition key is at MAR.
F0D0280m
F0D0036m
IMPORTANT With the engine off
and the ignition key at MAR, prolonged use (e.g.: for more than an
hour) of accessories with high current
intake could deploy the battery, even
preventing the engine from starting.
fig. 114
76
Correct functioning is only ensured
if the accessories are fitted with a homologated plug, as installed on all Lineaccessori Fiat components.
fig. 115
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F0D0248m
CURRENT SOCKET
fig. 116
ASHTRAY AND CIGAR
LIGHTER
To remove the ashtray, pull B upwards as shown in fig. 118.
WARNING
The cigar lighter gets very
hot. Be careful how you
handle it and make sure it is not
used by children: danger of fire or
burns.
In Panorama versions, passenger ashtrays are located in side upholstery.
Use:
1 - to use the cigar lighter press button A-fig. 117 after approximately 15
seconds it will return automatically to
its initial position and it is ready for use.
IMPORTANT Always check that
the cigar lighter has turned off.
2 - to open the ashtray, pull the cover B in arrow direction.
WARNING
fig. 117
F0D0034m
F0D0035m
Do not use the ashtray as a
waste paper basket: contact with lit cigarettes could cause
a fire.
Never use the cigar
lighter as current socket
since it could be damaged! For this kind of use (including mobile phones recharge)
only use the current sockets (A,
B, or C) shown on previous page.
fig. 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
77
SUN VISORS fig. 119
MULTIMETER
CENTRE SIDE REAR
WINDOWS
(Panorama and Combi versions)
These are positioned to the sides of
the rearview mirror. They can only
swing up or down.
See the booklet provided by the multimeter Manufacturer for more detailed information on operation and
use.
The centre side windows can slide
horizontally.
The driver and passenger’s sun visors
are both equipped with a document
pocket on the back and also the instructions for demisting the front windows.
To open the windows, operate the
tab as shown in figure fig. 120.
Multimeter is compulsory on vehicles
with weight exceeding 3.5 tons (with
or without trailer).
fig. 119
78
F0D0087m
F0D0056m
IMPORTANT Changes to the instrument or to the signal transmission
system which effects the instrument
recordings, especially for fraudulent
purposes, may be a criminal offence.
fig. 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
IMPORTANT For all versions fitted with tachograph (excluding the
Minibus version), it is suggested to remove the 10 A red fuse marked with
F34 (CFO control unit on dashboard
right side) in case of prolonged vehicle stop (over 10 days).
IMPORTANT NOTES
DOORS
Do not use abrasive detergents or
solvents to clean the device. To clean
its external surface, use a wet cloth or
special products for cleaning synthetic materials.
The multimeter is installed and
sealed with lead by authorised personnel: access to the device and relevant power and recording cables is
forbidden.
The vehicle owner is responsible for
governing the instrument use. The inspection must be carried out at least
every two years and will include a test
to confirm correct operation.
Locking by hand from the
outside
WARNING
Turn the key to position 1-fig. 121.
Make sure it is safe to open
a door before doing so.
Opening by hand from
the inside
DRIVER’S CAB DOORS
Lift sill button A-fig. 122 and pull the
door handle B.
Opening by hand from
the outside
Locking the door by hand
from the inside
Turn the key to position 2fig. 121and pull the door handle in the
direction of the arrow.
Close the door and press sill button
A.
fig. 121
F0D0083m
F0D0082m
After the inspection, check that the
plate is updated with specified data.
fig. 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
79
SIDE SLIDING DOOR
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle
parked with the sliding
doors open, always check that the
door hooks are properly fastened
into the retaining device.
The sliding door opens in the same
way as the driver’s cab door.
MOBILE FOOT BOARD
fig. 124 (where provided)
The side sliding door is equipped
with a lock that stops it at the end of
its opening run. Push the outer handle
A-fig. 123 (or the corresponding inner one) to arrow direction.
When opening cab or load compartment side door, a foot board will
come out under the vehicle floor to
make easier to get into the vehicle.
In any case, always make sure that
the door is correctly fastened in the
door open catch.
WARNING
Always make sure the foot
board is fully retracted before moving off. Since the foot
board is interlocked with the side
sliding door, if the foot board is not
fully retracted or rear doors are not
perfectly closed will cause instrument panel warning light ´ coming on.
WARNING
fig. 123
80
F0D0658m
F0D0084m
Do not move the vehicle
with side doors open.
fig. 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR DOUBLE DOORS
Opening the first door by hand
from the inside (2-fig. 125)
Closing the second door
by hand (1-fig. 125)
Opening the first door by hand
from the outside (2-fig. 125)
Lift sill button A-fig. 126 and pull the
door handle B.
Close the door and press handle Cfig. 111 inwards (position 127).
Turn the key to position 2-fig. 121
and pull the door handle in the direction of the arrow.
Opening the second door
by hand (1-fig. 125)
The double rear doors are fitted with
a catch which stops the opening at an
angle of approximately 90°.
Pull handle C-fig 127 in the direction shown (position 2).
Locking the first door by hand
from the outside (2-fig. 125)
Turn the key to position 1-fig. 121.
IMPORTANT For proper use of
the 2 rear swing-doors always make
sure that swing-door 1 (fig. 125) is secured before closing swing-door 2.
Closing the first door by hand
from the inside (2-fig. 125)
fig. 125
fig. 126
F0D0179m
F0D0162m
F0D0178m
Close the door and press button Afig. 126.
fig. 127
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
81
WARNING
The catch system is designed to ensure the best
comfort in use. An accidental knock
or gust of wind could release the
doors and make them close.
REAR DOUBLE DOOR
TOTAL OPENING TO 270°
Closing the door:
– pull the door outwards, releasing
it from the two magnetic pads
Open and close the door as described previously.
– Refit the catch and close the door.
Opening the door completely:
Keep the contact surfaces of the magnets on
the door and on the side
clean to keep the magnetic pads
efficient.
– release the 90° catch A-fig. 128
It is possible to increase the opening angle of the two doors to facilitate
loading and unloading operations. Release the catches A-fig. 128. This will
allow opening the doors by approximately 180°.
– Open the door fully against the
sides; two magnetic pads B-fig. 129
will hold the door open.
WARNING
Do not move the vehicle
with the rear doors open.
F0D0081m
fig. 128
82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F0D0245m
WARNING
When open to 180° the
doors are not blocked. Do
not use this system when the vehicle is parked on a slope or when it
is windy.
fig. 129
When operating one of the rear or
side door lock, only that door will be
locked/unlocked.
From the outside
B - to open/close right window.
The door handle on the passenger
side has a button C-fig. 132 to control that particular window.
FRONT DOOR WINDOW
REGULATORS
When the doors are closed, insert
and turn the key in the lock of one of
the driver’s cab doors.
Manual control
From the inside
Electric control
When the doors are closed, press
(to lock) or lift (to unlock) one of the
driver’s cab door safety sill buttons.
There are two buttons fig. 131 to
control the front door electrical windows located in the inside handle of
the driver’s door. They work when
the key is turned to MAR:
Use the window winder A-fig 130 to
open or close the door window.
fig. 131
F0D01870m
IMPORTANT If one of the cab
doors is not shut properly or there is
a failure in the system, the central
locking feature will not work and, after some attempts, the device will stop
working for about 2 minutes. In these
two minutes, the doors can be locked
or unlocked manually without the
electrical system coming into play.
A - to open/close left window
F0D0120m
IMPORTANT Central door locking
is active on all doors if front doors (cab
doors) are used for opening/closing.
After the two minutes, the control
unit is ready to receive commands
once more. If the reason for the malfunctioning has been removed, the device will start to work properly again.
If not, it will cut once more.
F0D0121m
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING
fig. 130
fig. 132
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
83
WARNING
Improper use of the electrical windows can be dangerous. Before and during their operation ensure that any passengers in
the vehicle are not at risk from the
moving glass either by personal objects getting caught in the mechanism or by being injured by it directly.
BONNET
WARNING
Perform this operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
OPENING
Proceed as follows:
– Pull the lever on the left-hand side
of the steering column A-fig. 133.
– Lift the bonnet from the front by
raising lever B-fig. 134.
WARNING
The bonnet might fall violently if the support rod is
not positioned properly.
– Release the support rod from its
clip C-fig. 135 and insert it in recess
D in the bonnet.
F0D0053m
fig. 133
84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
F0D0180m
WARNING
Always remove the ignition
key when you get out of the
vehicle to prevent the electric windows being operated accidentally
and constituting a danger to the
people left in the vehicle
fig. 134
Scarves, ties and other
loose articles of clothing
could easily get caught up in moving parts. This can be extremely
dangerous for the wearer.
WARNING
Be very cautious operating
the engine compartment
when the engine is hot - danger of
burns! Wait until the engine cools.
CLOSING
WARNING
For safety reasons the bonnet shall always be perfectly closed when travelling. Always
check for proper bonnet locking. If
the bonnet is left inadvertently open,
stop the car immediately and close
the bonnet.
Proceed as follows:
1) hold the bonnet up with one hand
and, with the other, remove rod fig.
135 from recess D replace it in its clip
C;
2) lower the bonnet at approx. 20
cm from the engine compartment and
then let it drop, ensuring that it is fully closed and not just held in position
by the safety catch. If the bonnet does
not close properly do not push it
down but open it again and repeat the
above procedure.
F0D0181m
WARNING
fig. 135
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
85
HEADLIGHTS
Have the headlight positioning
checked at a Fiat Dealership and
adjusted if necessary.
ADJUSTING THE FRONT
HEADLIGHT BEAM
When the vehicle is loaded, it
“slopes” backwards. This means that
the headlight beam rises. In this case,
it is necessary to return it to the correct position.
The correct positioning of the headlight beams is very important for the
comfort and safety, not only of the
person driving the vehicle but also all
other road users.
This is achieved by turning knob Afig. 136 to the load condition illustrated on the following page.
This is also covered by a specific law.
F0D00043m
To ensure you and other drivers
have the best visibility conditions when
travelling with the headlights on, the
headlights must be set properly.
fig. 136
86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
Check the positioning of
the headlight beams every
time you change the load to be carried.
Version
Position 0
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Van (11- 15)
driver only
do not use
do not use
full load
Camping Car (11 - 15)
driver only
do not use
full load
do not use
Van and Camping car (MAXI)
driver only
do not use
full load
do not use
Panorama and Combi (11)
1, 2 or 3 people on
front seats
all seats occupied
all seats occupied
plus max load on
rear axle
driver
plus max load on
rear axle
front seats
plus front seat row
occupied
Panorama and Combi (15)
1, 2 or 3 people on
front seats
all seats occupied
plus last seat row
occupied
do not use
all seats occupied
plus max load on
rear axle
driver + max load
on rear axle
Panorama 4WD (11) with max limit
in load compartment of 550 kg.
1, 2 or 3 people on
front seats
all seats occupied
do not use
all seats occupied
plus max load on
rear axle
driver + max load
on rear axle
front seats
plus last seat row
occupied
Minibus - School Bus (MAXI) - Ambulances
all load conditions
do not use
do not use
do not use
Truck - Crew cab - Chassis cowl (11 and 15)
driver only
do not use
full load
do not use
Truck - Crew cab - Chassis cowl (MAXI)
driver only
do not use
full load
do not use
IMPORTANT Do not use positions identified in the table with “do not use” for vans, trucks and crew cabs.
IMPORTANT Contact Fiat Dealership for checking and adjusting front fog lights.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
87
ABS
The vehicle is fitted with an ABS
braking system (optional), which prevents the wheels from locking when
braking, makes the most of road grip
and gives the best control when emergency braking under difficult road conditions.
The driver can tell the ABS system
has come into play when he feels the
brake pedal pulsating slightly and the
system gets noiser.
This should not be interpreted as a
fault in the brakes; on the contrary it
is a sign that the ABS system is working: it tells the driver that the vehicle
is travelling at the limit of its road grip
and that he should alter his speed to
fit the type of road surface.
The ABS system is an addition to the
basic braking system. If there is a malfunction, the system turns off automatically and only the ordinary brakes
continue to work.
If a failure occurs, and consequently
the anti-lock function is not effective,
the braking system will continue to
work as usual.
88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If you have never driven a vehicle
with ABS before, you should practice
using the system on slippery terrain,
obviously with the necessary safety
precautions and keeping to the Highway Code of the country you are in.
It is also a good idea to read the following information carefully.
The advantage in using the ABS system is that it continues to give you
maximum manoeuvrability even when
braking hard in conditions of poor grip
by preventing the wheels locking.
You should, however, not expect the
braking distance to always decrease:
for example surfaces with gravel or
fresh snow on a slippery road will in
fact increase the braking distance.
To exploit the ABS system to the full
in the event of necessity, you should
take heed of the following advice:
WARNING
The ABS exploits the tyreroad grip available to the
full, but it cannot improve it; you
should therefore take every care
when driving on slippery surfaces,
and not take unnecessary risks.
WARNING
If the ABS system cuts in it
is a sign that the grip between the tyre and the road surface
has reached the limit: you must
slow down to match the speed to
the road grip available.
WARNING
If there is a fault, the warning light > will light up on
the dashboard. At this point, reduce
speed and go to a Fiat Dealership
to have your vehicle checked and
put right immediately.
Braking while cornering always requires extreme care even when using
ABS.
The most important advice to follow
is this:
WARNING
When the ABS cuts in, and
you feel the brake pedal
pulsating, do not remove your foot,
but keep it pressed. In doing so you
will stop in the shortest amount of
space possible under the current
road conditions.
If you follow these tips you will be
able to brake better in any situation.
IMPORTANT Vehicles fitted with
ABS shall only be fitted with wheel rims,
tyres and brake pads of the make and
model approved by the vehicle manufacturer.
The system is completed with an electronic brakeforce distributor called
EBD which improves braking system
performance by means of the ABS system control unit and sensors.
WARNING
The vehicle is fitted with an
electronic brakeforce distributor (EBD). The > and x
warning lights come on at the same
time when the engine is running to
indicate that there is an EBD system failure. In this case violent
braking may be accompanied by
early rear wheel locking with the
possibility of skidding. Drive extremely carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have the system
checked.
WARNING
Warning light > alone,
with the engine running,
normally indicates a fault in the
ABS system only. In this case, the
braking system is still efficient,
though without the anti-locking device. Under these conditions, performance of the EBD system may
be reduced. In this case too, you are
advised to go immediately to the
nearest Fiat Dealership, driving in
such a way to avoid sharp braking
to have the system checked over.
WARNING
If the x brake fluid low
warning light comes on,
stop the vehicle immediately and
contact the nearest Fiat Dealership.
Fluid leaks from the hydraulic system, in fact, can compromise brake
system operation, both traditional
systems and systems with ABS.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
89
FRONT AND SIDE
AIRBAGS
The front airbag (driver’s and passenger’s) is a safety device which comes into action in the event of a head-on collision.
In case of crash, an electronic control unit processes the signals from deceleration sensor and, when required,
triggers the inflation of the cushion.
It consists of a cushion that inflates
instantaneously contained in a special
recess:
The bag inflates instantly and acts as
a protective barrier between the front
seat passengers and the structures in
front of them that could cause injury.
The bags deflate immediately afterwards.
FRONT AIRBAGS
– in the centre of the steering wheel
for the driver; fig. 137;
F0D0131m
– in the dashboard and with a bigger
cushion for the passenger fig. 138.
fig. 137
90
F0D0169m
Description and operation
The front airbag (driver and passenger) has been designed to protect the
occupants in the event of head-on
crashes of medium-high severity, by
placing the cushion between the occupant and the steering wheel or dashboard.
fig. 138
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In case of crash, a person not wearing the seat belt moves forward and
may come into contact with the cushion while it is still inflating. Under this
circumstance the protection offered
by the airbag is reduced.
The front airbag (driver and passenger) is therefore not a replacement of
but is complementary to the use of
belts, which should always be worn, as
specified by law in Europe and most
non-European countries.
In the case of minor head-on collisions, (for which the restraining action
of the seat belt is sufficient) the airbag
is not triggered.
In collisions against highly deformable
or mobile objects (such as road signs,
heaps of gravel or snow, parked vehicles, etc.), in rear crashes (such as
bumps from behind by another vehicle), side impacts, and in case of wedging under other vehicles or protective
barriers (for example under a truck or
guard rail), the airbag is not triggered
as it offers no additional protection
compared with the seat belts, consequently, it would be pointless.
FRONT AIRBAG
PASSENGER SIDE
Therefore, failure to come into action in the above circumstances does
not mean that the system is not working properly.
Airbag system efficiency is constantly monitored by an electronic control
unit.
If warning light ¬ (A-fig. 139)
comes on when travelling (indicating a
fault), have immediately the system
checked and repaired at a Fiat Dealership.
The passenger’s front airbag has been
designed and calibrated to improve the
protection of a person wearing seat
belts.
At its maximum inflation, its volume
fills most of the space between the
dashboard and the passenger.
WARNING
SERIOUS DANGER If it is
absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front passenger seat with the cradle
child’s seat facing backwards, the front passenger’s air bag
must be deactivated using the key
switch. In this case it is absolutely
necessary to check the warning
light F (see paragraph “Passenger’s front air bag”) to make sure
that deactivation has actually taken place.
F0D0190m
WARNING
With passenger’s air bag
active, never place child’s
seats with the cradle facing backwards since the air bag activation
could cause to the child serious injuries, even mortal, regardless of the
seriousness of the crash that triggered it. You are advised to carry
children always with proper restraint systems on the rear seats, as
this is the most protected position
in the case of a crash.
fig. 139
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
91
The key-operated switch (Afig. 140) has two positions:
– front passenger’s airbag on (position ON P): instrument panel warning light off F; it is absolutely prohibited to carry a child on the front
seat.
– front passenger’s airbag off (position OFF F): instrument panel
warning light on F; it is possible to
carry a child protected by special restraint system on the front seat.
The instrument panel warning light
F (B-fig. 141) stays on permanently until the passenger’s airbag is reactivated.
Deactivation of the front passenger’s
airbag does not inhibit operation of
the side airbag.
Deactivation/reactivation takes place
with ignition key at STOP and operating it in the special key switch on the
left side of the tachograph.
F0D0163m
IMPORTANT Operate the switch
only when the engine is not running
and the ignition key is removed.
fig. 140
92
fig. 141
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The purpose of the side bag is to
protect the front seat passenger’s
chest in the event of a side impact of
medium to high degree.
The device consists of a bag housed
in the front seat backs which immediately inflates. This solution ensures
that the bag is in an optimal position
regardless of the seat position.
In the event of a side impact, the control unit processes the signals from a
deceleration sensor and fires the side
bag.
The bag inflates instantly and acts as
a soft protective barrier between the
front seat passenger’s chest and vehicle door. The bag deflates immediately afterwards.
F0D0042m
Should it be absolutely necessary to
carry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s airbag can be deactivated.
SIDE BAGS fig. 142
F0D0227m
Manual deactivation
fig. 142
In the event of low speed side collisions (for which seat belts are sufficient protection), the airbag is not triggered. Also in this case, it is important
to wear seat belts at all times. This will
ensure correct positioning of the passenger and prevent being projected
from the vehicle in the event of very
violent crashes.
The side bag (driver and passenger)
is therefore not a replacement of but
is complementary to the use of belts,
which should always be worn, as specified by law in Europe and most nonEuropean countries.
GENERAL WARNINGS
The front and/or side airbags
may be deployed if the vehicle is
subject to heavy knocks or accidents involving the underbody
area, such as for example violent
shocks against steps, kerbs or low
obstacles, falling of the vehicle in
big holes or sags in the road.
Triggering of the airbags releases a small amount of powder.
This powder is not harmful and
does not indicate the start of fire.
The unfold cushion surface and
the vehicle interiors could be covered by dusty remains: this dust
could irritate skin and eyes. In
case of contact, wash yourself using neutral soap and water.
The airbag system has a validity
of 14 years as to the pyrotechnic
charge and 10 years as to the coil
contact (see the plate set on the
left front door post near hinges).
As these dates approach, contact Fiat Dealership for replacement.
If an accident has triggered the
airbag, contact a Fiat Dealership
so that the whole safety device,
electronic control unit, belt, pretensioners can be replaced and
have the electric system checked
over.
All control, repair and replacement operations concerning the
airbags must only be carried out
at a Fiat Dealership.
If you are having the vehicle
scrapped, have the airbag system
deactivated at a Fiat Dealership
first.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
93
If the vehicle changes ownership, the new owner must be informed of the method of use of
airbags and the above warnings
and also be given this Owner
Handbook.
The triggering of pretensioners
and front and side airbags is decided in a differentiated manner
by the electronic control unit, depending on the type of crash. The
failure to deploy one or more of
them does not mean that the system is not working properly.
WARNING
When the passenger’s front
airbag is active (passenger
front airbag deactivation switch at
ON), the F warning light will
come on for approx. 4 seconds and
flash for other four seconds when
the ignition key is turned to MAR to
remind the driver that the passenger’s front and side airbags (where
provided) will be fired in the event
of a crash. The warning light should
go off immediately afterwards.
WARNING
Do not apply stickers or
other objects to the steering wheel or to the airbag console
on the passenger’s side. Never travel with objects on your lap, in front
of your chest or with a pipe, pencil,
etc. between your lips; injury may
result in the event of the airbag being triggered.
WARNING
If the ¬ warning light does
not turn on when turning
the ignition key to MAR or if it stays
on when travelling, this could indicate a failure in safety retaining systems; under this condition air bags
or pretensioners could not trigger
in the event of collision or, in a restricted number of cases, they could
trigger accidentally. Stop the car
and contact Fiat Dealership to have
the system checked immediately.
94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
If the vehicle has been
stolen or an attempt to
steal it has been made, if it has
been subjected to vandals or floods,
have the airbag system checked by
Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
Always keep your hands on
the steering wheel rim
when driving, so that if the airbag
is triggered, it can inflate without
meeting any obstacles which could
cause serious harm to you. Do not
drive with the body bent forwards,
keep the seat back rest in the erect
position and lean your back well
against it.
WARNING
On vehicles equipped with
side bags, do not cover the
backrest of the front seats with
trims or covers.
WARNING
Remember that with the
key engaged and in the
MAR position, even with the engine not running, the airbags may
be triggered on a stationary vehicle if it is bumped by another moving vehicle. Therefore, never seat
children on the front seat even
when the vehicle is stationary. On
the other hand, remember that
with the vehicle stationary, without the key engaged and turned,
the airbags are not triggered in the
event of an impact; in these cases,
failure to come into action of the
airbags cannot be considered as a
sign that the system is not working
properly.
WARNING
The correct operation of
front and side airbags and
pretensioners is only ensured if the
vehicle is not overloaded.
WARNING
Do not wash the seat back
in vehicles with side bags
with pressurised steam or water in
automatic seat washing station.
EOBD SYSTEM
(petrol versions only)
The EOBD (European On Board Diagnosis) system fitted on the vehicle
complies with Directive 98/69/CE
(EURO 3).
This system continuously monitors
the engine emission system components. Furthermore, the system warns
the driver of deterioration concerning
the emission system components by
means of the U warning light on the
instrument panel.
The objective is to:
– monitor system efficiency;
WARNING
The airbag does not substitute the seat belts, but only increases their effectiveness.
Moreover, since the front airbags
do not come into operation in the
event of front impact at low speed,
side collisions, bumps from behind
or overturning, in these circumstances the occupants would only
be protected by the seat belts which
must therefore always be fastened.
– warn when failures can increase
emissions over the threshold established by the European regulations;
– warn of the need to replace deteriorated components.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
95
Furthermore, the system is equipped
with a connector for interfacing with
specific tools used to read the error
codes stored in the control unit memory along with a set of diagnostic and
engine specific parameters.
Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible if
the U warning light either does not come on when the
key is turned to MAR or comes
on, with fixed or flashing light,
when travelling. Warning light U
operation can be checked by
means of special equipment by
traffic agents. Always comply
with the road traffic regulations
in force in the Country where you
are travelling.
IMPORTANT After eliminating the
problem, your Fiat Dealership will
run a bench test to fully check the system. In some cases, a long road test
may be required.
96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ASR SYSTEM
(Antislip Regulation)
The ASR system controls the vehicle
drive and cuts in automatically every
time one or both driving wheels slip.
In slipping conditions, two different
control systems are activated:
– if the slipping involves both the driving wheels, the ASR function intervenes reducing the power transmitted
by the engine;
– if slipping involves only one driving
wheel, the ASR system cuts in automatically braking the wheel that is slipping.
The action of the ASR is particularly
helpful in the following circumstances:
– slipping of the inner wheel due to
the effect of dynamic load changes or
excessive acceleration.
– too much power transmitted to
the wheels also in relation to the conditions of the road surface.
– acceleration on slippery, snowy or
frozen surfaces.
– in the case of loss of grip on a wet
surface (aquaplaning).
WARNING
The performance of the
system, in terms of active
safety should not induce the driver
to take pointless and unnecessary
risks. The style of driving must in
any case always be adapted to the
conditions of the road surface, visibility and traffic. Road safety is always the driver’s responsibility.
SWITCHING THE ASR
SYSTEM ON AND OFF
The ASR function switches on automatically each time the engine is
started.
When travelling the device can be
switched off and on again pressing
switch A-fig. 143 on the centre console.
Function deactivation is indicated by
the instrument panel warning light Afig. 144 coming on. If the ASR function is turned off when travelling, it
will be restored at the following startup.
For correct operation of the ASR
system the tyres must absolutely be of
the same brand and type on all
wheels, in perfect conditions and,
above all, of the specified type, brand
and size.
ASR system failure indication
In the event of malfunctioning, the
ASR system is automatically disconnected and the warning light V on
the instrument panel comes on with
fixed light.
IMPORTANT When travelling on
snowy road with snow chains, it may
be helpful to turn the ASR device off:
in fact, in these conditions, slipping of
the driving wheels when moving off
makes it possible to obtain better
drive.
Press once button A-fig. 143 to
check that the signalled information is
correct:
F0D0251m
– button pressed, the warning light
stays on, ASR system fault detected.
In this case the vehicle will go o as a
vehicle not equipped with this system.
Anyway, you are recommended to go
to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.
F0D0206m
fig. 143
– button pressed, the warning light
goes off, no ASR system faults are detected;
fig. 144
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
97
SOUND SYSTEM
LIGHT SET-UP
The system consists of:
Visit a Fiat Dealership if
you want to fit a sound
system after buying the
vehicle. They can advise you on
how to safeguard battery life. Excessive idle intake can damage
the battery and may invalidate
the warranty.
– radio power supply cables
– dashboard front speaker cables
– housing for the radio
– aerial and relevant wire
HEAVY SET-UP
The system consists of:
– radio power supply cables
– dashboard front speaker cables
– dashboard speakers
– door speaker cables
For the Panorama version, four additional speakers are provided, two on
the right and two on the left side, set
one in the body side and the other on
the top of the pillar.
For the Combi version, two additional rear speakers are provided, one
per body side.
The sound system should be installed
in the compartment occupied by the
object tray which can be removed by
releasing the two retaining tabs Afig. 145.
The power supply, speaker connection and aerial cables can be found in
this compartment.
– door speakers
F0D0171m
– housing for the radio
– aerial and relevant wire.
fig. 145
98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SOUND SYSTEM (optional)
The complete system consists of:
– system set-up (see previous paragraph)
– sound system (radio with cassette
or CD player) with removable front
panel (for features and operation, see
the attached “Sound system” supplement).
For speakers, use the housings at the
ends of the dashboard fig. 146:
A - left-hand speaker housing
B - right-hand speaker housing.
To install: dismantle the press-fitted
dashboard panel and insert the speaker in its special recess.
The wiring diagram is as follows
(fig. 148):
Connector A
A1 Vehicle speed
A2 Booster
A3 Spare
A4 Key-controlled power (+15)
A5 Aerial power
A6 Light
A7 Power + (battery)
A8 Ground
fig. 146
F0D0060m
F0D0061m
To fit speakers in the doors, loosen
screws A-fig. 147 and remove the
protection grid. After securing the
speakers refit the protecting grid.
fig. 147
F0D0672m
IMPORTANT The cables are secured to the heater cables bundle with
adhesive tape to cut out noise.
fig. 148
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
99
Connector B
B1 Door speaker
passenger’s side (+)
B2 Door speaker
passenger’s side (-)
B3 Dashboard speaker
right side (+)
B4 Dashboard speaker
right side (-)
B5 Dashboard speaker
left side (+)
B6 Dashboard speaker
left side (-)
B7 Door speaker
driver’s side (+)
B8 Door speaker
driver’s side (-)
CELLULAR PHONE
SET-UP
The system set-up consists of:
– dual-purpose aerial (sound system
+ cellular phone), built into the passenger’s door mirror;
The wiring connection diagram is:
– dual-purpose aerial connection
wires and ten-pin connector wiring
fig. 149;
2 Spare.
1 Sound system MUTE function.
3 Cellular phone INPUT ground
signal (–).
– front door speakers.
4 Cellular phone INPUT ground
signal (+).
5 Spare
6 Spare
F0D0106m
7 Ignition switch power (+15).
8 Spare
9 Battery power (+).
WARNING
10 Ground.
See the information given
in the “Accessory installation” section when making electrical connections so as not to damage the system.
fig. 149
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Max. aerial power is 20W.
IMPORTANT The optional cellular phone set-up is bound to “Heavy
set-up” or “Radio” purchase.
AERIAL
Aerial is built into the passenger’s
door mirror.
100
WARNING
The hands-free telephone you purchase will
need to be compatible
with your cellular telephone.
Have the cellular telephone and the connections to the system installed by a Fiat Dealership only.
This will ensure the best results
and prevent problems which
could impair vehicle safety.
RADIO
TRANSMITTERS AND
CELLULAR
TELEPHONES
Cellular telephones and other radio
transceiver equipment (e.g. HAM radio system) must not be used inside
the vehicle unless a separate aerial is
mounted on the outside of the vehicle.
IMPORTANT The use of cellular
telephones, HAM transmitters or other similar devices inside the passenger
compartment (without external aerial) produces RF electromagnetic fields
which, amplified by the resonance effects inside the passenger compartment may cause vehicle electrical system to malfunction.
ROOF RACK/
SKI RACK
Use the special pins fitted to the edge
of the roof panel to attach the all-purpose roof rack support bars fig. 150
Vehicles with long wheelbase have
eight pins and those with short or
medium wheelbase, six.
There are two different types of pins
for fastening the roof rack in place:
A - pins for vans with normal and
high roof
B - screw with housing for roof rack
closed with a threaded plug for vans
with extra high roof.
Moreover, the transmission and receiving quality deteriorates due to the
screening effect of the vehicle body.
F0D0088m
Have the cellular phone and the connections to the system installed by a
Fiat Dealership.
fig. 150
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
101
AT THE FILLING
STATION
Never put even the tiniest amount of leaded
petrol in the fuel tank of
your Ducato even in an emergency. You would damage the
catalytic converter beyond repair.
PETROL ENGINES
Use unleaded petrol only.
However, to avoid mistakes, the fuel filler is too small for the leaded
petrol pump.
Octane rating (R.O.N.) must not be
lower than 95.
F0D0193m
An inefficient catalytic
converter will allow
harmful exhaust fumes to
be emitted and thus contribute
to air pollution.
fig. 151
102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DIESEL ENGINES
The vehicle must only
be filled with diesel fuel
for motor vehicles, in
compliance with European Specification EN590. The use of other
products or mixtures may irreparably damage the engine
with invalidation of the warranty due to the damage caused. In
the event of accidentally filling
with another type of fuel, do not
start the engine and empty the
tank. If the engine has been run
even for only a very short time,
in addition to the tank, it is also
necessary to drain out the whole
fuel circuit.
To avoid possible problems, fuelling
stations usually sell summer, winter or
arctic (mountain/cold areas) fuel according to the period of the year.
If refuelling with diesel fuel not suitable
for the temperature of use, add
DIESEL MIX to the fuel, in the proportions written on the container. Pour
the antifreeze into the fuel tank before
the fuel.
DIESEL MIX antifreeze is effective
only if it is added before the cold begins to take effect on the fuel. Adding
the product after will not have any effect.
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap C-fig. 153 is fitted
with a key lock and a device B securing it to the lid A so that it cannot be
lost.
Open lid A-fig. 152 pressing where
indicated by the arrow to get to the
fuel filler cap.
When refuelling, position the cap on
the flap as shown in fig. 153.
F0D0139m
Diesel fuel fluidity decreases at low
temperatures due to the paraffin it
contains and can clog up the fuel filter.
fig. 152
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
103
IMPORTANT The airtight seal of
the cap may lead to a slight increase of
pressure in the tank. A hissing sound
when the cap is removed is therefore
quite normal.
If required, replace the
fuel cap with another genuine cap to avoid affecting
the efficiency of the fuel vapour
recovery system.
After refuelling, screw the cap until
hearing one or more clicks, turn the
key and then remove it.. close the lid.
IMPORTANT Moreover, before
starting the engine, for the sake of
safety, check whether the refuelling
gun is properly hung onto the fuel
pump.
WARNING
Keep naked flames or lighted cigarettes away from
the fuel filler hole as there is a danger of fire. Do not bend too close to
the hole either so as not to breathe
in harmful vapours.
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
Protection of the environment has
been the guiding principle in the design
of the Fiat Ducato right from the start.
The result is the use of materials and
creation of devices that can reduce or
considerably curtail harmful influences
on the environment.
The devices for curtailing petrol engine emissions are:
– a three-way catalytic converter;
– a lambda sensor;
– a fuel evaporation system.
F0D0140m
The devices for curtailing diesel engine emissions are:
– an oxidising catalytic converter;
– an exhaust gas recirculation system
(E.G.R.) (for certain versions).
Consequently, the Fiat Ducato is
ready to travel well ahead of the most
stringent international pollution control
standards.
fig. 153
104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
STARTING
THE ENGINE
WARNING
It is dangerous to let the engine run in a garage of other closed area. The engine consumes oxygen and gives off carbon
dioxide, carbon monoxide and other poisonous fumes.
HOW TO START PETROL
VERSIONS
IMPORTANT Do not press the
accelerator until the engine has started.
1) Ensure that the handbrake is up.
2) Put the gear lever into neutral.
IMPORTANT Do not leave the ignition key at MAR when the engine is
off.
Minibus and School Bus versions:
press the ignition enable button located to the left of the steering column as shown in the specific supplement to this handbook.
3) Press the clutch pedal down to
the floor without touching the accelerator.
4) Turn the ignition key to AVV and
release it as soon as the engine starts.
WARNING
Never touch the high voltage cables (spark plug cables) when the engine is running.
If the engine does not start at the
first attempt, return the ignition key
to STOP before trying to start the
engine again.
If the warning light Y stays on when
the ignition key is at MAR, turn the
key to STOP and then to MAR; if the
warning light stays on, try with the
other keys provided.
If you are still unable to start the engine, go to a Fiat Dealership.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
105
HOW TO START DIESEL
VERSIONS
1) Ensure that the handbrake is up.
2) Put the gear lever into neutral.
3) Press the clutch pedal down to
the floor without touching the accelerator.
4) Turn the ignition key to MAR. Instrument panel warning lights m and
Y will come on.
5) Wait for the instrument panel
warning light Y to go out.
6) Wait for the instrument panel
warning light m to go out. The hotter the engine is, the quicker this will
happen.
7) Turn the key to AVV immediately after the m warning light goes out.
If you wait too long, you will lose the
benefit of the work done by the glow
plugs.
Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
106
The warning light m
will flash (for approximately 60 seconds) at
start-up or during prolonged
cranking to signal a fault in the
glow plug heating system. You
can use the vehicle as usual if the
engine starts but you should contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as
possible to have problem seen to.
Intake air heater (Heat Flange)
GENERAL NOTES
SELENIA 20K (petrol engines) is recommended
when the vehicle is mainly
used in relatively mild climates. If
however, the vehicle is mainly
used where the climate is particularly severe, the use of SELENIA
PERFORMER MULTIPOWER
(petrol engines) or SELENIA WR
(diesel engines) is recommended.
An air heating device is fitted on the
intake manifold inlet in 2.8 JTD versions to facilitate starting the engine in
cold weather.
This device will be switched on automatically when the key is turned to
MAR.
The heater is fitted in all 2.8 JTD versions with EGR system. It is optional
for other JTD versions.
The engine start-up procedure is the
same with and without the heater.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the engine does not start first time,
return the key to STOP before trying to start the engine again.
If warning light Y remains lit when
the ignition key is at MAR, turn the
key to STOP and then to MAR; if the
warning light stays on, try with the
other keys provided.
If you still cannot start the engine,
get in touch with a Fiat Dealership.
IMPORTANT When the outside
temperature is low, it is important to
note that the use of a more fluid oil
will facilitate starting the cold engine.
Therefore, in winter, follow the advice
in chapter “Technical specifications”,
paragraph “Fluids and lubricants”.
IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition key at MAR when the engine is off.
Minibus and School Bus versions:
press the ignition enable button located to the left of the steering column as shown in the specific supplement to this handbook.
HOW TO WARM UP
THE ENGINE AFTER IT
HAS JUST STARTED
(petrol and diesel versions)
– Begin to move forward slowly letting the engine turn at medium revs.
Do not accelerate abruptly.
Catalysed vehicles must
not be bump started
(pushed, towed or coasted downhill) as this could cause
fuel to flow into the catalytic exhaust system and damage it beyond repair.
– Do not push the engine to its limit for the first few kilometres. You are
recommended to wait until the
coolant temperature indicator starts
to move.
EMERGENCY START-UP
If the Fiat CODE system fails to
recognise that code transmitted by the
ignition key (warning light Y on the
instrument panel lit) the emergency
start-up can be performed by using the
CODE card code.
See the “In an emergency” section.
WARNING
Remember that until the
engine has started the
brake booster and power steering
systems will not work and a greater
effort will therefore be required to
depress the brake pedal or turn the
steering wheel.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
SWITCHING OFF
THE ENGINE
Turn the ignition key to STOP while
the engine is idling.
A quick burst on the accelerator before turning
off the engine serves absolutely no practical purpose and
wastes fuel. It can also damage
turbo-charged engines.
PARKING
HANDBRAKE
The handbrake lever is located on
the left-hand side of the driver’s seat.
Switch off the engine, pull up the
handbrake and engage a gear (1st gear
or reverse, according to whether the
vehicle is facing up or downhill) and
leave the wheels turned. If the vehicle is left on a steep slope, wedges or
a rock should be used to lock the
wheels.
Pull the lever upwards as far as it will
go to apply the handbrake. Instrument
panel warning light x will come on
when the key is turned to MAR.
IMPORTANT The vehicle must be
blocked after three or four lever releases when the vehicle is empty; the
number of releases necessary to block
it depend on the load and on the road
slope.
Do not leave the ignition key at
MAR to prevent running the battery
down. Always remove the key when
you leave the vehicle.
In case of problems, contact a Fiat
Dealership to have it adjusted.
WARNING
IMPORTANT After a taxing drive
you should allow the engine to “catch
its breath” before turning it off by letting it idle to allow temperature in the
engine compartment to fall.
F0D0044m
Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
fig. 1
108
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
USING THE
MANUAL GEARBOX
IMPORTANT Only engage the reverse gear when the vehicle is completely stationary.
2) keep the button pressed and lower the lever. Warning light x will go
out;
Press the clutch fully before shifting
the gear stick into one of the positions
shown in the diagram fig. 2 (the diagram is also on the gear lever knob).
With the engine running, before engaging reverse, wait for at least 2 seconds with the clutch pedal pressed to
avoid damaging the gears and grating.
3) press the brake pedal when carrying out this operation to prevent the
vehicle moving accidentally.
To engage reverse, lift the sliding ring
A under the knob and shift the lever
to the left and forth.
To release the handbrake:
1) slightly lift the handbrake and press
release button A-fig. 1;
IMPORTANT Pull the handbrake
lever only when the vehicle is at a
standstill, or when the vehicle is running, but however only in case of a failure of the hydraulic system.
WARNING
You must press the clutch
fully down to change gear
properly. It is therefore essential
that there is nothing under the pedals. Make sure that mats are lying
flat and do not get in the way of
pedals.
F0D0057m
Should the handbrake be exceptionally used when the vehicle is running, it
is suggested to keep a moderate traction to avoid causing the rear axle
block, entailing vehicle side skidding.
fig. 2
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
ELECTRONIC
AUTOMATIC
GEARBOX
(2.8 JTD versions
only)
STARTING
STOPPING THE VEHICLE
After starting the engine, with the engine idling and keeping the brake pedal pressed, move the gearshift lever to
position D. Release the brake pedal
and gradually press the accelerator
pedal.
To stop the vehicle, simply press the
brake pedal regardless of the position
of the gearshift lever.
The automatic gearbox fitted on Fiat Ducato features four speeds plus
reverse with self-adapting control (i.e.
capable of adapting to the driver’s driving style), which transmits power
continuously and with very fast electro-hydraulic gear engagement times.
IMPORTANT Movement of the
lever from position P is allowed only
with the ignition key at MAR and the
button on the lever and the brake pedal pressed.
IMPORTANT Removing the ignition key is only allowed with the
gearshift lever in position P and for a
maximum time of 30 seconds from
when the engine is turned off P, when
the door is opened a buzzer will sound
for about 15 seconds to alert the driver.
Do not attempt to obtain peak performance
until the engine has
reached normal operating temperature.
In the case of an emergency (faults,
flat battery, etc.) the ignition key can
be removed from the switch fitting a
screwdriver in hole in fig. 3 set under
the ignition switch and pressing upwards
STARTING THE ENGINE
The engine can be started only with
the gearshift lever in the P or N position.
F0D0236m
For safety reasons, it is advisable to
start the engine with the brake pedal
pressed.
IMPORTANT When moving off after starting the engine, do not press
the accelerator pedal before and during the movement of the gearshift
lever. This is particularly important
when the engine is cold.
With the engine idling, also
on a level surface, and the
gearshift lever in position D or R,
the vehicle tends to move if the
brake pedal is not kept pressed.
fig. 3
110
WARNING
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
SELECTING AUTOMATIC/
SEQUENTIAL MANUAL
OPERATION
Sector A of the lever: automatic
operation.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
For automatic operation move the
gearshift lever to the right sector Afig. 4 in one of the four positions:
The display fig. 5 will show lever positions: P - R - N - D.
The main feature of this gearbox is
the possibility of being used in the automatic or sequential manual mode.
The operating mode is chosen positioning the gearshift lever in the right
sector A-fig. 4 (automatic gearshifting) or left sector B (sequential manual gearshifting).
Sector B of the lever: sequential
manual mode.
P = parking
The display fig. 6 will show the different engaged ratios: 1 - 2 - 3 - 4.
N = neutral
R = reverse
F0D0247m
D = forward gear.
P - Parking
To prevent accidental movements, the
lever can only be moved to position P
with the button C-fig. 4 pressed.
When the vehicle is parked, always set
the lever to this position. A device in
the gearbox locks the driving wheels.
F0D0239m
F0D0237m
fig. 5
WARNING
Always pull the handbrake
completely before leaving
the vehicle.
fig. 4
fig. 6
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
111
WARNING
Move the gearshift lever to
position P when getting out
of the vehicle leaving the engine
running.
Move the gearshift lever to position
P with the vehicle stationary and the
engine idling before switching off.
For safety reasons the ignition key
can only be removed with the gearshift
lever in this position.
IMPORTANT Removing the ignition key is only allowed with the
gearshift lever in position P and for a
maximum time of 30 seconds from
when the engine is turned off P, when
the door is opened a buzzer will sound
for about 15 seconds to alert the driver.
R - Reverse
Move the gearshift lever to R with
the vehicle stationary, the engine idling
and the brake pedal pressed.
To prevent accidental movements,
the lever can only be moved to this
position with the button C-fig. 4
pressed.
In an emergency (flat battery) it is
possible to move the gearshift lever
from position P, pressing the clamping device fig. 7 set under the gearshift
lever cap.
With the lever in position R the reverse lights turn on and a buzzer
sounds for about 4 seconds to warn
the driver.
IMPORTANT With the lever in
position R, reverse gear is not engaged
if the vehicle speed exceeds the established limit (approx. 12 km/h).
When the speed falls below this value,
reverse gear engages and stays engaged even if the limit is exceeded.
WARNING
F0D0240m
Before moving the lever
from position P, press the
brake pedal: the vehicle must be
stationary.
WARNING
IMPORTANT Movement of the
lever from position P is only allowed
pressing the button C-fig. 4 with the
brake pedal pressed.
Before moving the lever,
press the brake pedal: the
vehicle must be stationary.
fig. 7
112
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
N - Neutral
D - Forward gear
This corresponds to the neutral position of a standard manual gearbox.
This is the position to be used when
driving forward normally. The electronic control unit controls automatic engagement of the 4 gears depending on the position of the accelerator,
driving speed, engine rpm, longitudinal
and transversal acceleration and the
type of road.
This position is to be used if the vehicle is to be pushed or towed.
WARNING
With the engine idling and
the gearshift lever at N the
vehicle tends to move by inertia if
it is not on a level surface: keep the
brake pedal pressed when the lever
is at N.
The electronic gearbox can chose
between different operating programmes, which range between comfortable economy driving and sporty
driving coming into operation between
the lowest and the highest speed.
Pressing the accelerator pedal quickly the gearbox will immediately select
the sportier programme to meet the
request for increased performance. To
disengage the function release the accelerator by at least 1/4 of the stroke.
In the same way, during braking a
lower gear is engaged to better exploit
the braking action of the engine. If
there is another bend the new ratio
will be engaged already when slowing
down before the bend, this way at the
end of the bend the gearbox will not
have to shift gear to cope with acceleration.
WARNING
With the engine at idle
speed and the gearshift
lever at D, the vehicle tends to move
also on a level surface: keep the
brake pedal pressed until moving off.
Kickdown
To obtain optimum acceleration, for
example when overtaking, the gearbox
will kickdown by two gears simply by
quickly pressing fully home the accelerator pedal (in 1/10 of a second).
Engagement of the next longer ratio
will take place when the maximum
rpm limit is reached.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
113
Engaging the automatic
WINTER programme
(only with lever in “D”)
SEQUENTIAL MANUAL
OPERATION
For the sequential manual operation
mode, move the lever to the left sector B-fig. 4 with two positions:
Press button A-fig. 8 to engage the
automatic WINTER programme that
makes the vehicle starting in 2nd gear.
This mode is recommended under
poor grip conditions (snow, ice, mud,
etc.).
(+) = engagement of the higher ratio;
(–) = engagement of the lower ratio.
Moving the gearshift lever to the
manual sector is only possible from
position D: the ratio selected by the
automatic gearbox when the lever is
moved will remain engaged.
Use this function only when required
in poor grip road conditions then continue driving with the WINTER function off.
The WINTER function shall always
be off on slopes.
F0D0241m
When the sequential manual mode is
selected, the display shows the engaged gear fig. 6.
To select the higher ratio move the
lever in the (+) direction and to shift
down move the lever to (–).
fig. 8
114
IMPORTANT If the request to
downshift would cause engine
overevving, this is eliminated by the
electronic control unit. Moreover, if
the manually engaged gear causes engine overevving, the electronic control
unit will shift gear automatically to the
most appropriate one (AUTO-UP).
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
When the sequential manual mode has been set and
a high gear is engaged, to accelerate rapidly, for example to overtake, it is necessary to downshift
by hand: the kickdown feature
cannot be engaged!
Moving the lever back to position D
the gearbox instantly resumes the automatic mode selecting the ratio according to the driving characteristics.
IMPORTANT The electronic control unit is programmed to change
gear one at a time, therefore repeated fast actuations will not result in repeated engagements of the gears. The
higher or lower gear is engaged moving the lever to the (+) or (–) position
when the previous request has been
performed.
FAILURE INDICATIONS
– Warning light glowing steadily = automatic gearbox oil maximum
temperature.
Automatic gearbox faults are indicated by the warning light A-fig. 9 on
the instrument panel.
If the warning light turns on and
glows steadily when travelling, this indicates that the gearbox oil has
reached the maximum temperature.
You are therefore advised to stop the
vehicle with the engine at idle speed
and gearshift lever in “N” or “P” (in
this case engine cooling fans are on),
until the warning light goes out and resume your journey without pushing
the engine to peak performance.
Turning the ignition key to MAR the
warning light should turn on and go
out after about 4 seconds. If the warning light stays on or if turns on when
travelling, this indicates a gearbox fault
(flashing light) or gearbox oil overheating (steadily glowing light).
In the event of a fault to the sequential manual system, the system will select the automatic mode.
F0D0192m
If the warning light turns on again, it
is necessary to stop again with the engine idling until it goes out.
If there are less than 15 minutes between one turning on of the warning
light and the next, you are advised to
stop the vehicle, do not switch off the
engine but allow the engine-gearbox
unit to cool down completely (both
engine cooling fans off).
fig. 9
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
115
– Warning light flashing = automatic gearbox fault.
Warning light flashing at starting or
when travelling indicates a fault in the
automatic gearbox.
The automatic control system sets
an “emergency programme” engaging
the 3rd gear.
Switching the engine off and then on
again, the self-test system could exclude the fault and therefore turn off
the warning light. The failure is however stored and the automatic gearbox shall be checked at a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
When travelling with the
gearbox faulty, the reversing gear lock might not be active:
absolutely never move the lever to
the R position with the vehicle on
the move.
BUMP STARTING
Starting by pushing or towing the vehicle is not possible. In the event of an
emergency, when the battery is flat,
start the vehicle with a suitable emergency battery, following the instructions given in section “In an emergency” at paragraph “Jump starting”.
TOWING THE VEHICLE
WARNING
When travelling with the
gearbox faulty, drive with
the utmost care in consideration of
the limited performance (in terms
of acceleration and speed) that the
vehicle can offer.
116
IMPORTANT For towing the vehicle comply with current local regulations and follow the instructions given in section “In an emergency” at
paragraph “Towing the vehicle”.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is to be towed, adhere
to the following recommendations:
– if possible, carry the vehicle on the
floor of a rescue vehicle;
– if this is not possible, tow the vehicle raising the driving wheels (front)
from the ground;
– if this, too, is not possible, the vehicle should not be towed for more
than 200 km at a speed of no more
than 50 km/h.
When towing, the gearshift lever
should be at N.
Do not start the engine
while the vehicle is being
towed.
The failure to comply
with these instructions
may cause serious damage to the automatic gearbox.
CONSTRUCTION FEATURES
GENERAL FEATURES
– gearshift lever position;
DUCATO automatic gearbox is controlled electronically with four forward gears and reverse.
Electronic gearbox control makes it
possible to obtain gearshifting suited
to momentary engine characteristics
with a certain elasticity.
– accelerator pedal position;
It is controlled by an electronic control unit which handles:
– the torque distributor;
– gearshifting;
– specific programmes.
The electronic control unit has the
following task:
The control unit also communicates
with the injection system electronic
control unit.
– adapting the oil pressure for
gearshifting to the engine torque;
Conditions of use analysed by
the control unit
– activating safety functions;
The gearbox is coupled with a flow
power torque distributor with piloted
antislip device which makes it possible
to obtain demultiplication ratios.
– defining the manual gearshifting
programme;
The characteristic of this gearbox
which works without idle gear enables:
For controlling these operating logics the control unit uses the following signals:
– higher compactness and weight reduction;
– brake pedal position.
– system diagnostics.
– engine rpm;
– improved output due to less friction;
– engine temperature;
– lower stress of transmission components.
– vehicle speed;
– engine torque;
– gearbox oil temperature;
The control unit analyses each single
condition of use of the vehicle, discriminating it on the basis of the signals received from the various sensors.
Analysed conditions are the following:
– starting (position/accelerator pedal changing speed);
– acceleration (accelerator pedal
completely pushing down speed);
– full load (number of engine full load
kickdown signals or position maintenance time);
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
117
– braking (accelerator pedal release
time and braking system operation);
– type of programme (gearshift selector lever position);
– winter driving (driving wheel
torque reduction);
– driving with trailer or uphill (vehicle speed in relation to transmitted
torque)
– driving downhill (vehicle acceleration in relation to the position of the
accelerator pedal);
Gearshift programme control
Automatic programme
To optimise vehicle handling the
electronic control unit has the following memorised programmes:
This comprises 16 gearshifting programmes.
– automatic operation;
– manual operation;
– winter driving (to be selected
through button WINTER);
– engine warming up;
– protection against excessive gearbox oil temperature .
– driving in towns or queues (accelerator pedal position and vehicle
speed);
– gear required by the driver
(gearshift lever position);
– cold starting (engine temperature).
118
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
In relation to the vehicle speed and
torque transmitted, the control unit
detects the slope of the road surface
and depending on the sporty features
chosen, it autonomously chooses the
programme most suited to the situation.
During gearshifting, the gearbox control unit asks the injection control unit
to momentarily reduce the torque.
The duration of torque reduction
varies depending on the travelling conditions.
Manual sequential programme
Engine warming up programme
This function enables manual sequential use of the gearbox merely
moving the selector lever to the left.
This programme allows the engine to
reach normal operating temperature
in the shortest time possible (depending on the outside temperature)
highering the gearshifting points, in relation to engine temperature.
Each time the lever is pressed only
one gear is shifted: more than one shift
cannot be obtained.
To avoid overevving or excessively
low engine rpm, the control unit inhibits requests for gearshifting that
would cause such situations.
Winter driving programme
This programme is engaged by pressing button WINTER near the
gearshift lever,
in case of driving wheel skidding and
it changes to specific gears.
Starting is possible only in 2nd gear.
On snowy roads use however snow
chains and/or tyres.
The programme engages automatically after starting, if the engine temperature is below 30 °C and it remains
active up to 34 °C.
Excessive gearbox oil
temperature programme
SAFE DRIVING
In designing Ducato, Fiat has made
every effort to come up with a vehicle
able to provide driver and passengers
with top-class levels of safety. Nevertheless it is always the behaviour of the
person at the wheel that determines
road safety.
In the following pages you will find
some simple tips to help you travel in
safety under different conditions. You
will no doubt be familiar with many of
them already but it will be useful to
read them all carefully.
This is activated when the gearbox
oil temperature reaches 120 °C and it
remains active down to 117 °C.
To facilitate oil cooling, this programme inhibits gearshifting, either up
or down. It is however possible to use
the manual programme.
The WINTER function shall always
be off on slopes.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
119
BEFORE GETTING BEHIND
THE WHEEL
– Make sure all light, including the
headlights, are working properly;
– adjust the position of seats and driving and door mirrors properly for the
best driving position;
– make sure that nothing (mats, etc.)
gets in the way of the pedals when
they are pushed down;
– make sure that any child restraint
systems (child seats, cradles, etc.) are
properly fixed;
– place any objects in the load compartment in such a way that they cannot be thrown forwards in the event
of an accident;
– light eating will help keep your reflexes prompt. Above all, do not have
anything alcoholic to drink.
Remember to periodically check:
– tyre pressure,
– brake fluid level,
– windscreen washer fluid level.
WHEN TRAVELLING
– The first rule of safe driving is prudence;
– prudence also means putting yourself into a position where you can predict wrong or imprudent behaviour
from other drivers;
– stick closely to the rules of the
road in the particular country where
the vehicle is being driven and, above
all, do not exceed speed limits;
– ensure that, besides yourself, all the
other passengers in the vehicle have
their seat belts fastened, that children
are sitting in the appropriate child
seats and any animals in the vehicle are
placed in suitable compartment;
– you should be physically fit and
mentally alert before setting out on
long journeys.
– engine oil level,
– engine coolant level and cooling
system conditions,
120
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
Driving while drunk or under the influence of drugs
or certain medicines is dangerous
for both you and other road users.
WARNING
Always fasten both front
and back seat belts
(Panorama, Minibus, Combi and
Crew Cab versions). Travelling with
the seat belts unfastened increases the risk of injury or death if you
are in a collision.
WARNING
Do not drive with objects
on the floor in front of the
driver’s seat: they could caught under the pedals making braking or
accelerating impossible.
DRIVING AT NIGHT
WARNING
Water, ice or salt sprinkled
on the road can deposit on
the brake discs and reduce efficiency of the first braking.
These are the main rules to follow
when you are driving at night:
– drive especially carefully: it is harder to drive at night;
– slow down especially if the road is
not lit;
WARNING
Pay attention to the mats:
even a small problem to the
braking system may require increased brake pedal stroke with respect to normal.
– Do not drive too many hours at a
time but stop at intervals to stretch
your legs and recoup your energy;
– make sure the air in the passenger’s
compartment is being changed
continuously;
– never coast downhill (i.e. with the
engine off): if you do, you lose the aid
of engine braking, power brakes and
power steering so that braking requires greater effort on the pedal and
steering requires greater effort on the
steering wheel.
– at the first signs of sleepiness, stop:
continuing would be a risk for yourself
and everybody else. Only start driving
again when you have had enough rest;
– keep a greater safety distance from
the vehicles in front of you than during daylight hours: it is hard to judge
how fast other vehicles are going when
all you can see are their lights;
– make sure the headlights beams are
properly positioned: if they are too
low, they reduce visibility and strain
your eyes. If they are too high they can
dazzle other drivers. Adjust headlight
beam according to transported load;
– only use main beam headlights
when you are driving outside town
and when you are sure they do not annoy other drivers. dip your headlights
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
121
as soon as you see vehicles coming in
the other direction and pass them with
the headlights dipped;
– Do not drive through puddles at
speed and hold on tightly to the wheel
if you do: a puddle taken at high speed
might cause you to lose control of the
vehicle (aquaplaning);
IMPORTANT On stretches of
road with good visibility, switch off
your rear foglights; the brightness of
these lights could annoy the people
travelling in the vehicles behind.
– be careful of animals crossing the
road when driving in the country. Slow
down to avoid the risk of running
them over.
– Position the ventilation controls for
demisting (see section “Getting to
know your vehicle”), to prevent visibility from worsening;
– Remember that fog also means the
taramac is wet and therefore manoeuvres of all kinds are more difficult
and stopping distances are longer;
DRIVING IN THE RAIN
– Routinely check the conditions of
the windscreen wiper blades.
– keep a good distance from the vehicles in front of you;
DRIVING IN FOG
– as far as possible, avoid spurts of
speed or sudden deceleration;
– If the fog is thick, do not start out
on a journey unless you absolutely
have to.
– do not overtake other vehicles if
possible;
– keep all lights clean;
Rain and wet road surfaces spell danger. All manoeuvres are more difficult
on a wet road because the grip of the
wheels on the tarmac is greatly reduced. This is why braking distances
are much longer and road-holding is
lower.
Here is some advice for driving in the
rain:
– reduce speed and maintain a
greater safety distance from the vehicles in front;
– If it is raining particularly heavily,
visibility is also reduced. In these cases, switch on the dipped headlights
even if it is still daylight so you can be
seen more easily;
122
If driving in mist, blanket fog or when
there is the danger of fog patches:
– keep your speed down;
– turn on the dipped headlights, rear
fog lights and front fog lights, if fitted,
even during the day. Do not drive with
your headlights at main beam.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
– if you are forced to stop your vehicle (breakdown, limited visibility,
etc.) try to stop off the road. Turn on
the hazard lights and, if possible, the
dipped beam headlights. Rhythmically
sound the horn if you release another vehicle is coming.
DRIVING IN THE
MOUNTAINS
– Check fluid levels (oil, brake fluid,
coolant) and tyre wear before driving
in the mountains;
– when driving downhill use the engine braking effect by engaging a low
gear so as not to overheat the brakes;
– under no circumstances should you
drive downhill with the engine off or
with the gear in neutral, let alone with
the ignition key out;
– drive at moderate speed and avoid
“cutting” corners;
DRIVING ON SNOW
AND ICE
Here are some tips for driving in
these conditions:
– keep your speed down;
– use chains if the roads are covered
with snow;
– do not park the vehicle with the
engine running for long periods of
time: snow could divert exhaust fumes
into the passenger compartment;
– mainly use the braking effect of the
engine and under all circumstances
avoid braking sharply;
– when braking a vehicle not fitted
with ABS, reduce the possibility of the
wheels locking by varying the pressure
you exert on the brake pedal;
– do not accelerate suddenly and
avoid swerving;
– in the winter, even apparently dry
roads may have icy patches. Be careful therefore when driving over
stretches that do not get much exposure to the sun or are lined with trees
or rocks where ice might not have
melted;
– keep a good distance from the vehicles in front.
DRIVING WITH ABS
– ABS is a braking system that essentially offers two advantages:
1) It prevents wheel lock and consequent skidding in emergency stops,
particularly when the road does not
offer much grip.
2) it makes it possible to brake and
steer at the same time and direct the
vehicle where you want while braking.
– remember that overtaking while
going uphill is slower and therefore requires more free road. If you are being overtaken while driving uphill,
make it easier for the other vehicle
to pass.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
123
To get the most out of ABS:
– During emergency stops or when
grip conditions are poor, you will feel
a slight pulsation on the brake pedal.
This is the sign that the ABS is working. Do not release the brake pedal but
continue to press so as not to interrupt the braking action;
– ABS enables you to brake and steer
at the same time. If you meet an unexpected obstacle you can therefore
steer around it;
– the ABS prevents the wheels from
locking but it does not increase actual grip conditions between tyre and
road. Therefore, even if your vehicle
is fitted with ABS, keep a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you and
keep your speed down when driving
into bends.
ABS serves to increase your control
over the vehicle, not to enable you to
go faster.
124
CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS
Some suggestions which may help
you to keep the running costs of the
vehicle down and lower the amount
of toxic emissions released into the atmosphere are given below.
GENERAL
CONSIDERATIONS
Vehicle maintenance
Carry out the checks and adjustments/regulations specified in the
“Service Schedule”.
Tyres
Check tyre inflation pressure regularly. Tyres should be checked at least
once every four weeks: if the pressure
is too low, fuel consumption increases as the resistance to the rolling
movement of the tyre is greater.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
Unnecessary loads
Do not travel with too much load.
The weight of the vehicle (specially in
urban traffic) and its trim greatly effects consumption and stability.
Roof rack/ski rack
Remove the roof or ski racks from
the vehicle as soon as they are no
longer needed. These accessories reduce the aerodynamic penetration of
the vehicle and will increase consumption. When transporting particularly large objects, use a trailer,
where possible.
Electric devices
Unnecessary actions
Top speeds
Use electric devices for the necessary time only. The heated rear window, fog lights, windscreen wipers,
heater fan require large amounts of
electricity and increasing the request
for power will also increase fuel consumption (up to +25% when driving in
towns).
Avoid revving the engine when
stopped at traffic lights or before
switching off the engine and avoid doubling the clutch as these actions have
no purpose on modern vehicles and
serve only to increase consumption
and pollution.
Fuel consumption increases considerably as speed increases. Your speed
should be kept as even as possible and
superfluous braking and acceleration
avoided as this increases both consumption and emissions.
Acceleration
Gear selections
Climate control system
The climate control system is an additional load which greatly affects the
engine leading to higher consumption.
When the temperature outside the
vehicle allows it, use the air vents
where possible.
DRIVING STYLE
Starting
Do not warm the engine when the
vehicle is stationary or at high or low
speed: in this way the engine will warm
up gradually increasing consumption
and emissions. You should drive off
slowly straight away avoiding high revs
so that the engine will warm up more
quickly.
As soon as the traffic and road conditions allow it, shift to a higher gear.
Using a low gear to liven up acceleration greatly increases consumption. In
the same way improper use of high
gears will increase consumption, emissions and engine wear.
Accelerating violently increasing the
revs will greatly affect consumption
and emissions; acceleration should be
gradual and should not exceed the
maximum torque.
On passenger transportation versions
fitted with 2.3, 2.8 JTD and 2.8 JTD
POWER engines, fuel consumption can
be optimised by starting (on level road)
in 2nd gear instead of 1st gear.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
125
Cold starting
Frequent cold starting will not enable
the engine to reach optimal running
temperature. It follows, therefore,
that consumption will be higher (from
+15 to +30% in towns) as will the
production of toxic emissions.
Traffic and road conditions
Heavy traffic and higher consumption
are synonymous: for example, when
driving slowly with frequent use of lower gears or in towns where there are
numerous traffic lights.
Winding roads, mountain roads and
bumpy roads also have a negative effect
on consumption.
LOAD
RECOMMENDATIONS
Each of these limits must be
borne in mind and MUST
NEVER BE EXCEEDED under any
circumstances. In particular, never
exceed the maximum weight permitted on the front and rear axles
when arranging loads in vehicle (especially for special version vehicles).
The version of the Ducato you are
driving has been designed and approved on the basis of several set
maximum weights (see the tables
“Weights” in section “Technical specifications”):
– kerb weight
– payload
– total weight
– total weight on the front axle
WARNING
– total weight on the rear axle
– towable weight
Enforced halts
During prolonged stops (traffic lights,
level crossings, etc.) the engine should
be switched off.
fig. 10
126
WARNING
F0D0047m
CONDITIONS OF USE
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
Chance knocks or sudden
braking can cause sudden
shifts of the load which could jeopardise the safety of the driver and
the passengers: before you start off
make sure the load is firmly secured
by using the hooks built into the
floor for that purpose fig. 10. Use
metal cables, ropes or straps strong
enough to support the weight of
the load to be fixed.
WARNING
Even if the vehicle is stationary on a steep hill or
sideways incline, goods not properly secured could fall out when the
back or side doors are opened.
WARNING
Observe the enforced rules
if you need to carry a spare
can of petrol. Only use a homologated can and secure it to the load
anchoring eyebolts. Even given
these precautions, the risk of fire in
the event of an accident is increased.
In addition to these general precautions, some simple measures could enhance driving safety, comfort and the
length of the vehicle’s life:
CHEAP RUNNING
THAT RESPECTS
THE ENVIRONMENT
– distribute the load evenly over the
load floor: if you need to concentrate
it all in one point choose the part between the axles;
Environmental protection has been
one of the guiding principles in the
production of the Ducato. It is no accident that its pollution control equipment is much more effective than that
required by current legislation.
– remember that the lower the load
is, the lower the vehicle’s centre of
gravity will be, contributing to a safe
drive; you should therefore always position the heavier goods at the bottom;
– finally, remember that the way in
which the vehicle moves is influenced
by the weight being carried. In particular, stopping distance lengthens particularly at high speed.
Nonetheless, the environment cannot get by without a concerted effort
from everyone. By following a few simple rules you can avoid harming the
environment and often cut down fuel
consumption at the same time.
On this subject, a few useful tips have
been given below to supplement those
marked by symbol # at various points
of the handbook. You are asked to
read both the former and latter carefully.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
LOOKING AFTER EMISSION
CONTROL DEVICES
The correct use of pollution control
devices not only ensures respect for
the environment but also has an effect
on the vehicle’s performance.
Keeping these devices in good conditions is therefore a fundamental rule
for driving that is easy on your pocket and on the environment too.
The first step to take is to follow the
Service Schedule to the letter.
If your vehicle has a petrol engine
with catalytic converter use only unleaded petrol.
if you have trouble starting, do not
keep turning the ignition key for long
periods. Be especially careful to avoid
bump starting the vehicle by pushing,
towing or rolling downhill: these are
all manoeuvres that can damage the
catalyst.
Use an auxiliary battery for start-ups
only.
128
If the engine begins to “loose its
smoothness” when travelling, continue your journey but reduce the demands you are making on the engine
and have the vehicle seen to at a Fiat Dealership as soon as you can.
When the instrument panel fuel reserve warning light comes on, fill up as
soon as possible. A low fuel level may
cause an uneven supply of fuel to the
engine with inevitable increase in the
temperature of the exhaust gas and serious damage to the catalytic converter.
Never run the engine with one or
more spark plugs disconnected, even
for testing purposes.
Do not warm up the engine by letting it idle for a while before moving
off unless the outside temperature is
very low and, even in this case, only
do so for less than thirty seconds.
Do not install heat shields and do not
remove those already fitted to the catalytic converter and exhaust pipe.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
Do not allow anything to
be sprayed onto the catalytic converter, lambda sensor and
exhaust pipe.
WARNING
When functioning normally the catalytic converter
reaches high temperatures. For this
reason do not park the vehicle over
inflammable material (grass, dry
leaves, pine needles, etc.): fire hazard.
WARNING
Ignoring the above rules
may lead to fire.
TOWING A TRAILER
IMPORTANT
The vehicle must be fitted with a homologated tow hitch and suitable electrical system for towing a caravan or
trailer. Have the tow hitch fitted by an
expert who will issue specific documentation for use on roads.
Fit special wing mirrors in accordance with the highway code.
Remember that towing a trailer
makes it harder for the vehicle to
climb the maximum gradients specified, increases braking and overtaking
distance, proportionally to the overall
weight of the trailer.
Engage a low gear when driving
downhill rather than constantly braking.
The weight the trailer exerts on the
vehicle’s tow hitch coupling reduces
the vehicle’s payload by the same
amount.
In order to be sure you are not exceeding the maximum towing weight
(shown in the log book) you have to
take into account the trailer weight fully laden including the accessories and
personal luggage.
Do not exceed the speed limits for
towing a trailer in the country you are
driving in. In any case, do not exceed
the top speed of 100 km/h.
WARNING
Where your vehicle is
equipped with ABS, remember that this has no effect over
the trailer braking system. Particular care must be taken on slippery
surfaces.
WARNING
Under no circumstances
modify the vehicle’s braking
system for trailer braking control.
The trailer braking system must be
completely independent from the
vehicle hydraulic system.
TOW HITCH INSTALLATION
The tow hitch must be fixed to the
body by an expert in accordance with
the following instructions and respecting the additional and/or integrative information provided by the tow
hitch manufacturer.
The tow hitch to be fitted must comply with the current regulations in
force, with reference to Directive
94/20/CEE and subsequent modifications.
Use a tow hitch suited for the maximum towable load of the vehicle version
on which the tow hitch is to be fitted.
Use a unified coupling for the electrical connections. The coupling is generally fitted on a specific mount fastened to the tow hitch.
For the electrical connections, a 7 or
13 pole 12VDC coupling must be used
(CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN standards).
Follow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the vehicle and/or
the tow hitch.
For the electric connections use the
proper trailer light control unit.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
129
F0D0242m
Ball centre
FITTING DIAGRAM
Van - Panorama - Combi Ambulance versions - fig. 11
The body of the tow hitch must be
secured by means of 6 screws in the
points shown Ø (use the left spring
attachment holes replacing the original
screws with other appropriately sized
and resistant screws).
Alternatively, a second tow hitch
with the following elongated dimensions has been homologated:
(1) mm 400
(2) mm 0
Ground
Suspension fastenings
Vehicle centre line
fig. 11
130
Fully laden
vehicle
Rear wheel axle
The electrical brake or other device
(electrical winch, etc.) must be powered directly from the battery by
means of a lead with a cross-section
area not smaller than 2.5 mm2.
In addition to the electrical connections, only the power wire for an additional electrical brake and for internal trailer lighting with a power not
exceeding 15W can be connected to
the vehicle’s electrical system.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
F0D0243m
Truck and Chassis cab versions fig. 12
An additional tow hitch - specific for
chassis cab and truck versions is shown
in fig. 12. The structure Ø must be secured to the points shown with a total
of twelve M 10 screws.
Holes to bore
Holes to bore
Existing holes
Fit the tow hitch with the light cluster
crossmember in its original position. If
the crossmember has been removed,
replace it with another crossmember
of the same size and resistance.
IMPORTANT Fasten a tag in
clearly visible position at the same
height as the tow hitch. This tag is
compulsory. It must be adequately
sized, made of suitable material and
carry the following information:
2 shims
Vehicle centre line
MAX ADMITTED LOAD ON
HITCH 80 kg.
2 shims
WARNING
After assembly, seal the fastening screw holes to prevent exhaust fumes from entering
the vehicle.
fig. 12
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
131
SNOW TYRES
Use snow tyres specified in the
“Snow tyres” table in section “Technical Specifications”.
Fiat Dealership will be happy to
provide advice concerning the most
suitable type of tyre for the customer’s
requirements.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflation pressures and the specifications
of snow tyres, follow the instructions
given at paragraph “Wheels” in section
“Technical Specifications”.
132
The winter features of these tyres
are reduced considerably when the
tread depth is below 4 mm. In this
case, they should be replaced.
All four tyres should be the same
(brand and track) to ensure greater
safety when driving and braking and
better driveability.
Due to the snow tyre features, under normal conditions of use or on
long motorway journeys, the performance of these tyres is lower than that
of normal tyres.
Remember that it is inappropriate to
change the direction of rotation of
tyres.
It is therefore necessary to limit their
use to the purposes for which they are
certified.
IMPORTANT When snow tyres
are used with a max. speed index below the one that can be reached by
the vehicle (increased by 5%), place a
notice in the passenger compartment,
plainly in the driver’s view which states
the max. permissible speed of the
snow tyres (as per EC Directive).
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
The max. speed for snow
tyres with “Q” marking is
160 km/h. The Road Traffic Code
speed limits must however be always strictly observed.
SNOW CHAINS
We recommend using Lineaccessori
Fiat snow chains.
The use of snow chains is regulated
by the legislation in force in the country the vehicle is driven in.
Check the tautness of the chains after driving some twenty to thirty metres.
The chains may only be applied to
the drive wheel tyres (front wheels).
WARNING
Refer to the following table
for information on the
wheels where snow chains can be
fitted. Follow the prescriptions.
With
chains
mounted keep
your speed down.
Do not exceed 50 kph. Avoid
holes in the road; do not mount
steps or kerbs. Do not drive long
stretches of snow-free road with
the chains mounted, as this can
damage the vehicle and the road
surface too.
Versions
Tyres on which
chains can be fitted
11
195/70 R15C
205/70 R15C
215/70 R15 Camping
15
205/70 R15C
215/70 R15 Camping
MAXI
215/75 R16C
205/75 R16C
215/75 R16 Camping
Types of snow chains
to be used
Snow chains with
reduced size with max.
protrusion beyond the
tyre profile of 15 mm
For rim size refer to “Wheels” in section “Technical Specifications”.
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
133
VEHICLE STORAGE
– make sure the handbrake is not engaged;
The following precautions should be
taken if the vehicle will not be used for
several months:
– clean and protect the painted parts
using protective wax;
– park the vehicle in covered, dry and
if possible well-ventilated premises;
– clean and protect the shiny metal
parts using special compounds readily available;
– engage a gear;
– remove the cables from the battery
(first remove the cable to the negative
terminal) and check the battery
charge. If the vehicle is to be stored
for long periods the charge of the battery should be checked every month
and recharged if it falls below 12.5 V;
134
– sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber windscreen and rear window
wiper blades and lift them off the glass;
– slightly open the windows;
– cover the vehicle with a cloth or
perforated plastic sheet. Do not use
sheets of non-perforated plastic as
they do not allow moisture on the vehicle body to evaporate;
GETTING THE BEST OUT OF YOUR VEHICLE
– inflate the tyres to 0.5 bar above
the normal specified pressure and
check it at intervals;
– do not drain the engine cooling system.
IMPORTANT Where relevant,
switch off the electronic vehicle alarm
with the remote control and deactivate the system by turning the emergency key to OFF (see “Electronic
alarm” in section “Getting to know
your vehicle”).
IN AN EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY
START-UP
1) Read the 5-figure electronic code
given on the CODE card.
DIESEL VERSIONS
3) Press and hold down the accelerator pedal. Warning light U will
come on for about 8 seconds, and
then go out. At this point release the
accelerator pedal and get ready to
count the flashes of the warning light
U.
Emergency start-ups cannot be performed on versions with a diesel engine; contact a Fiat Dealership.
PETROL VERSIONS
If the Fiat CODE cannot deactivate
the engine immobiliser, the Y and
U warning lights stay on and the engine will not start. Follow the emergency start-up procedure to start the
engine.
Read the whole procedure carefully before trying to carry it out.
If you make a mistake, you must turn
the ignition key back to STOP and repeat the whole operation from the beginning (step 1).
2) Turn the ignition key to MAR.
4) Count the number of flashes that
corresponds to the first figure of the
code on the CODE card, then press
the accelerator pedal and keep it there
until the warning light U comes on
for four seconds and then goes out;
release the accelerator pedal.
5) Warning light U will start flashing again: after it has flashed the number of times that corresponds to the
second figure on the CODE card,
press the accelerator pedal and keep
it pressed.
7) Once the final figure has been entered, keep the accelerator pedal
pressed. Warning light U will light up
for four seconds and then go out; release the accelerator pedal.
8) Warning light U will flash rapidly for about 4 seconds to indicate that
the operation has been completed
correctly.
9) Start the engine by turning the ignition key from MAR to AVV.
If, however, the warning light U
stays on, turn the ignition key to
STOP an repeat the procedure from
step 1).
IMPORTANT After an emergency
start-up, you should contact a Fiat
Dealership otherwise you will have
to repeat the procedure described
each time you want to start the engine.
6) Do the same for the remaining figures on the CODE card.
IN AN EMERGENCY
135
JUMP STARTING
IMPORTANT Do not directly
connect the two negative terminals:
sparks could ignite the flammable gas
from the battery. If the other battery
is fitted in a vehicle, prevent accidental contacts between the metal parts
of the two vehicles.
If the battery is flat, you can use another battery to start the engine. Its
capacity must be the same or slightly
greater than the flat battery.
Proceed as follows fig. 1:
3) Start the engine.
1) connect positive terminals 1 and
2 (+ sign near terminal) of the two
batteries with a jump lead;
4) when the engine has been started, remove the leads reversing the order above.
2) with a second lead, connect the
negative terminal 3 (– sign near the
terminal) of the auxiliary battery to an
earthing point 4 (E) on the engine or
gearbox of the vehicle to be started;
F0D0203m
If the engine fails to start after a few
attempts, do not keep turning the key
but have the vehicle seen at a Fiat
Dealership.
fig. 1
136
IN AN EMERGENCY
WARNING
Do not carry out this procedure if you lack experience; if it is not done correctly it
can cause very intense electrical
discharges and the battery might
even explode. The liquid in the battery is poisonous and corrosive.
Keep it away from the eyes and
skin. You are also advised not to put
naked flames or lighted cigarettes
near the battery and not to cause
sparks: risk of fire and explosion.
Under no circumstances
should a battery charger
be used to start the engine: it could damage the electronic systems and in particular
the ignition and injection control
units.
BUMP STARTING
Catalysed vehicles must
not be bump started
(pushed,
towed
or
coasted downhill) as this could
cause fuel to flow into the catalytic exhaust system and damage it beyond repair.
IF A TYRE IS
PUNCTURED
General instructions
If you are towing a trailer,
remove the trailer before
jacking up the vehicle.
Observe the instructions on this and the following pages to use the
jack and spare wheel correctly.
WARNING
WARNING
Remember that until the
engine has started the
brake booster and power steering
systems will not work and a greater
effort will therefore be required to
depress the brake pedal or turn the
steering wheel.
WARNING
WARNING
Never start the engine
when the vehicle is jacked
up.
The jack should only be
used to changed a wheel on
the vehicle for which it was designed. It should not be put to other uses or employed to raise other
models. Under no circumstances
should it be used when carrying out
repairs under the vehicle. An incorrectly positioned jack may cause
the vehicle to fall. Do not use the
jack to lift loads exceeding that indicated on the label attached to the
to the jack itself.
IN AN EMERGENCY
137
WARNING
Do not lubricate the bolt
threads before fitting
them back: they could come
loose.
1. STOP THE VEHICLE
– Stop the vehicle in a position that
is not dangerous for oncoming traffic
where you can change the wheel safely. The ground should be flat and adequately firm. If you have to change
the wheel at night, choose a lit area if
possible.
– Turn the engine off and pull up the
handbrake.
WARNING
Check tyre pressure and
spare wheel pressure regularly. Refer to section “Technical
Specifications”.
– Engage first or reverse gear.
– Alert other drivers that the vehicle
is stationary in compliance with local
regulations: hazard warning lights,
warning triangle, etc.
Any passengers should get out and
wait as far away as possible from the
danger of traffic.
If the road is sloping or bumpy, place
wedges or other suitable material to
prevent the vehicle from moving, under the wheels.
138
IN AN EMERGENCY
2. TAKE OUT THE TOOLS,
JACK AND SPARE WHEEL
The tools are in the cab near the
seats.
Please note:
– the jack weights 4.2 kg;
– the jack requires no adjustments;
– the jack cannot be repaired. If it
breaks it must be replaced with a new
jack;
– no other tool, apart from the extension and the ratchet wrench shown
in this chapter can be fitted to the jack.
The spare wheel is located under the
rear part of the load bed.
– release the spare wheel support
with the wrench E-fig. 5 inserted in
seat L-fig. 4 on the left-hand side of
the support and remove the wheel
from under the floor.
To get at the spare wheel:
– remove the two plastic caps Afig. 2;
– unscrew the two bolts C-fig. 2
with the ratchet wrench B and extension F-fig. 5;
– unscrew the two bolts C-fig. 3 on
the bumper internal side (chassis
cab/truck versions);
1) Loosen the wheel bolts on the
wheel to be changed by approximately one turn.
2) Turn the ring D-fig. 5 to open
the jack partially.
3) Position the jack near the wheel
to be changed.
F0D0093m
F0D0094m
Using the ratchet wrench will allow
you to hook and unhook the support
better.
4) Alert other passengers that the
vehicle is about to be raised; all persons should be kept away from the vehicle until it has been lowered.
5) Fit the extension F-fig. 5 and the
ratchet wrench B on the nut ring and
raise the vehicle until the wheel is a
few inches off the ground. When turning the jack handle make sure that it
can be used easily and take care not to
scrape your hand against the ground.
F0D0091m
fig. 4
F0D0092m
fig. 2
fig. 3
3. CHANGING THE WHEEL
fig. 5
IN AN EMERGENCY
139
7) Fit the spare wheel making sure
that the pegs H fit into holes G-fig. 7.
When fitting the spare wheel, make
sure the hub is clean so that the fixing bolts will not loosen.
The moving parts of the jack (screw
and joints) may also cause injury if
touched. Clean off any grease.
6) Unscrew the five bolts completely using wrench E-fig. 6 and remove
the wheel.
140
– hook the spare wheel support, using wrench E;
– screw the two fastening bolts and
position the two plastic caps;
10) Fasten bolts completely, working in a criss-cross fashion as shown in
fig. 7.
– put the jack and the tools back in
the bag under one of the two seats in
the cab.
F0D0089m
9) Lower the vehicle with the ratchet wrench and pull the jack out.
fig. 7
IN AN EMERGENCY
– place the wheel you have changed
in the spare wheel support;
8) Tighten the five wheel bolts.
F0D0090m
fig. 6
When you have finished:
IF A BULB
BURNS OUT
WARNING
Halogen bulbs contain
pressurised gas which, if
broken, may cause small fragments
of glass to be projected outwards.
WARNING
Modifications or repairs to
the electrical system carried out incorrectly and without
bearing the features of the system
in mind can cause malfunctions
with the risk of fire.
Only touch the metal
part when handling halogen bulbs. If the transparent bulb is touched it reduces the
intensity of the light emitted and
can also reduce the life of the
bulb. If you touch the bulb accidentally, rub it with a cloth
moistened with alcohol and leave
it to dry.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
When a light is not working, check
that it has not fused before changing
the bulb.
For the location of the fuses, refer to
“If a fuse blows” in this section.
Before replacing a bulb that does not
work, check that the contacts are not
oxidised.
Burnt-out bulbs must be replaced
with ones of the same type. Light from
bulbs with insufficient power is dim
while those which are too powerful
use too much electricity. Always check
the height of the headlight beam after
changing a bulb.
WARNING
You should have the bulbs
replaced at a Fiat Dealership, if possible. Correct operation
and proper beam height are essential for safe driving and compliance
with law requirements.
IMPORTANT On the inside surface of the headlight there could appear a slight coat of fogging; this does
not show a defect, since it is a natural occurrence due to low temperature
and to the degree of humidity in the
air; it will disappear as soon as the
lights are turned on. The presence of
drops inside the headlight shows water seepage, contact Fiat Dealership.
IN AN EMERGENCY
141
Figure
Type
W
Main beam headlights
D
H4
60/55 W
Dipped beam headlights
D
H4
60/55 W
Front side lights
B
R5W
5W
Front direction indicators
B
P21W
21 W
Side direction indicators
A
W5W
5W
Rear direction indicators
B
PY21W
21 W
Brake lights
B
P21W
21 W
Third brake light
B
P21W
21 W
Reversing light
B
P21W
21 W
Rear fog light/taillights
B
P21/4W
21 W
Front ceiling light
C
CW10
10 W
Rear ceiling light
C
CW15
15 W
Number plate light
B
CW5
5W
TYPES OF BULBS fig. 8
Bulbs
Several types of bulbs are installed in
the vehicle:
A. Glass bulbs
Snapped into position. Pull to remove.
B. Bayonet connection bulbs
Remove from the bulb holder by
pressing the bulb and rotating it anticlockwise.
C. Cylindrical bulbs
Remove by pulling away from terminals.
F0D0090m
D. Halogen bulbs
To remove the bulb, release the clip
holding the bulb in place.
fig. 8
142
IN AN EMERGENCY
IF AN EXTERIOR
BULB BURNS OUT
MAIN AND DIPPED BEAM
HEADLIGHTS
5) release the two retaining clips D
or F-fig. 14 and remove bulbs G or
H-fig. 14.
G - main beam headlight bulb
H - main beam headlight bulb.
To replace a halogen bulb with headlight disconnected, proceed as follows:
For the type of bulb and power refer to paragraph “If a bulb burns out”
in this section.
F0D0176m
1) loosen the four screws and remove the front grid A-fig. 9;
2) loosen the two fastening screws
B-fig. 10 and remove the headlight releasing pin D-fig. 11 from C;
3) release the retaining clips A-fig.
12 and remove the cover B;
4) remove the connector C or Efig. 13;
fig. 9
fig. 10
F0D0096m
F0D0175m
F0D0000m
fig. 11
fig. 12
IN AN EMERGENCY
143
FRONT SIDE LIGHTS
6) be careful to position the bulb
correctly
7) refit the retaining clips, the connector and the cover B-fig. 12 and
lock it with the relevant clips.
3) remove the bulb holder C-fig. 16
turning it slightly to release it;
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
4) remove the bulb E-fig. 17;
1) remove the headlight as described
previously;
5) replace the bulb, refit the bulb
holder and the cover B-fig. 15.
fig. 14
144
fig. 16
IN AN EMERGENCY
F0D0101m
F0D0100m
fig. 15
F0D0098m
fig. 13
F0D0099m
F0D0097m
2) release the retaining clips Afig. 15 and remove the cover B;
fig. 17
FRONT DIRECTION
INDICATORS
SIDE DIRECTION
INDICATORS
REAR LIGHT CLUSTER
To replace the halogen bulb proceed
as follows:
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1) loosen the two screws A-fig. 20
with a screwdriver
1) remove the headlight as described
previously;
1) Press the lens in the direction
shown fig. 18
2) remove the light cluster B and disconnect connector C
2) release the retaining clips Afig. 15 and remove the cover B;
2) remove the bulb holder A-fig. 19
turning it slightly and replace the bulb
B.
3) loosen the two screws D-fig. 21
and remove the light cluster:
3) remove the bulb holder D-fig. 16;
E - stop light bulb;
4) remove the bulb F-fig. 17 pushing it slightly and turning it anticlockwise at the same time;
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
F - bulb for reversing light
To replace these bulbs contact a Fiat Dealership.
5) after replacing the bulb refit the
bulb holder and the cover B-fig. 15.
G - bulb (amber) for direction indicators
fig. 19
F0D0073m
F0D0138m
H - twin-light bulb for rear fog light
and taillight
F0D0137m
fig. 18
To replace a bulb proceed as follows:
fig. 20
IN AN EMERGENCY
145
4) remove bulbs pushing them slightly and turning them anti-clockwise.
For truck and chassis cab versions:
THIRD BRAKE LIGHT fig. 23
To replace the bulb, proceed as follows:
Unscrew the four screws H-fig. 22
and replace the following bulbs:
5) replace the bulb, refit the bulb
holder in the light cluster, reconnect
connector C and refit it all fastening
the screws without forcing them.
1) loosen the two nuts A-fig. 24 set
inside the vehicle near the rear ceiling light;
I - bulb for reversing light
- bulb for rear fog light
L - bulbs for taillight (2)
M - bulb for brake light
F0D0156m
N - bulb for direction indicators.
fig. 21
146
fig. 22
IN AN EMERGENCY
F0D0157m
F0D0109m
F0D0072m
fig. 23
fig. 24
4) remove the bulb D pushing it
slightly and turning it anticlockwise;
5) replace the bulb, refit the bulb
holder, reconnect connector B and
refit it all fastening the two bolts without forcing them.
2) disconnect connector B-fig. 25;
To replace the bulb D-fig. 28 proceed as follows: insert the screwdriver in housing A-fig. 27 push the unit
rightwards and remove the bulb holder B-fig. 28 by pressing tab C. The
glass bulb D is clipped in.
F0D0158m
3) press the two retaining clips Cfig. 26 and remove the bulb holder;
NUMBER PLATE LIGHT
fig. 26
fig. 27
F0D0111m
F0D0110m
F0D0159m
fig. 25
fig. 28
IN AN EMERGENCY
147
IF AN INTERIOR
LIGHT BURNS OUT
REAR CEILING LIGHTS
2) Lift cover B-fig. 30 and remove
the bulb C.
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
Then, close the cover B and reposition the lens A.
For the type of bulb and power refer to paragraph “If a bulb burns out”
in this section.
1) Remove the clipped-on lens Afig. 31 with a screwdriver as shown in
the figure.
2) Lift the cover B-fig. 32 and remove the bulb.
FRONT CEILING LIGHT
F0D0117m
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1) Remove the clipped-on lens Afig. 29 with a screwdriver as shown in
the figure.
Then, close the cover B and reposition the lens A.
The procedure is the same for passenger compartment ceiling lights in
Panorama and Combi versions.
fig. 29
148
fig. 31
IN AN EMERGENCY
F0D0119m
F0D0118m
F0D0116m
fig. 30
fig. 32
IF A FUSE BLOWS
B - Undamaged fuse.
C - Fuse with broken filament.
Use the tongs D in the fusebox to
extract the fuse.
GENERAL FEATURES
A fuse is an element for protecting
the electrical system. A fuse will trip
(i.e. blow) in the event of a failure or
improper interventions in the electrical system.
If an electric device is not working,
check whether the respective fuse is
blown (i.e. the conductor is broken
fig. 33). If required, replace the blown
fuse with another with the same amperage (same colour).
Before changing a fuse,
check the ignition key has
been removed and that
all the other electric devices have
been turned off/disabled.
To locate the fuse, refer to the tables
on the following pages.
F0D0029m
WARNING
WARNING
If the fuse blows again,
have the vehicle inspected
at a Fiat Dealership.
Never change a fuse with
another amperage: FIRE
RISK!
Never replace a broken
fuse with anything other
than a new fuse. Always
use a fuse of the same colour.
Do not attempt to repair a
blown MAXI-FUSE. Go to a
Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
fig. 33
IN AN EMERGENCY
149
Fig. 36 - fusebox on the left-hand
side (CFB) (driver’s side; passenger’s
side for right-hand drive version).
Four fuseboxes are provided: two
fuseboxes are located at the dashboard ends, one is located in the engine compartment (near the air cleaner) and the last one is located on the
battery positive pole A-fig. 34 (CBA).
To reach the first fusebox on the lefthand side of the dashboard (driver’s
side; passenger’s side for right-hand
drive version), loosen the two screws
A-fig. 35.
F0D0141m
fig. 35
F0D0172m
fig. 34
150
fig. 36
IN AN EMERGENCY
F0D0144m
POSITION OF THE FUSES
Fig. 38 - fusebox on the right-hand
side (CFO) (passenger’s side; driver’s
side for right-hand drive version).
F0D0145m
F0D0142m
To reach the second fusebox on the
right-hand side of the dashboard (passenger’s side; driver’s side for righthand drive version), loosen the two
screws B-fig. 37.
fig. 37
fig. 38
IN AN EMERGENCY
151
F0D0232m
To reach the third fusebox (CVM) (fig. 41) in the engine compartment, remove the protective boot A–fig. 39 then slacken the screw B–fig. 40, release
fastener C and then remove cover D.
F0D0231m
F0D0233m
fig. 40
fig. 39
152
fig. 41
IN AN EMERGENCY
System/Component
CBA (battery fusebox)
Body-builders’ current socket
Alternator
Alternator (2.0 - 2.0 JTD with heating system)
Alternator (2.8 JTD with heating system - 2.0 JTD
with climate control system)
CVM protection
CFO protection
CFO (optional fusebox under the dashboard on passenger’s side
for LH drive versions, on driver’s side for RH drive versions)
Webasto unit
Additional climate control
Chronotachograph
Phone
Alarm
Remote control
ABI for right power window
ABI for door lock
Alarm blinker
Rotating lights (Ambulance versions)
Webasto timer
ABI for left power window
Food box power
Additional heater fan
Left heated rear window
Door mirror defrosting device
Right heated rear window
Driver’s seat warmer
Fuse no.
Ampere
Location
F 73
F 72
F 72
F 72
F 70
F 71
70
125
70
100
150
80
Fig. 34
Fig. 34
Fig. 34
Fig. 34
Fig. 34
Fig. 34
F 61
F 56
F 34
F 34
F 34
F 34
F 48
F 38
F 60
F 63
F 58
F 47
F 59
F 57
F 54
F 41
F 40
F 45
20
30
10
10
10
10
20
20
10
30
5
20
15
15
15
10
15
15
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
IN AN EMERGENCY
153
System/Component
Rear current socket
Siren (Ambulance versions)
Suction fan (Minibus versions)
Current socket for special set-up
CFB (main fusebox under the dashboard on driver’s side for
LH drive versions, on passenger’s side for RH drive versions)
Windscreen washer pump
Cigar lighter
Cab heater fan
Direction indicators
Hazard lights
Instrument panel
Cab lights
EOBD diagnostic socket
Rear fog lights
Radio
Front current socket
Headlight washer pump
Front right-hand side light
Rear right-hand side light
Front left-hand side light
Rear left-hand side light
Number plate lights
Side/taillight warning light
Control lights
PCA (Ambulance - Minibus versions)
Radio
ABI
Door power window control
154
IN AN EMERGENCY
Fuse no.
F 64
F 64
F 64
F 65
Ampere
20
20
20
10
Location
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
Fig. 38
F 43
F 44
F 55
F 53
F 53
F 53
F 39
F 39
F 33
F 32
F 52
F 49
F 12
F 12
F 13
F 13
F 24
F 24
F 24
F 51
F 25
F 35
F 35
15
15
30
10
10
10
10
10
7,5
15
20
15
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
7.5
7.5
7.5
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
System/Component
ABS control unit
Airbag control unit
Power mirrors
Cruise control
Phone
Chronotachograph
Remote control
Alarm
Brake lights
Instrument panel
PCC
Ignition switch
Cab fan (with Webasto system)
Webasto control unit
Cab fan (with climate control)
CVM (engine compartment fusebox)
Radiator fan low-speed resistor (2.0 with climate control system)
Engine control unit (2.0 with climate control system)
Engine cooling fan (2.0 with climate control system)
Engine control unit (2.0 with climate control system)
Engine cooling fan (2.0 with climate control system)
Engine control unit (2.0 with climate control system)
CFB protection
E.I. primary services
E.I. primary services
E.I. secondary services
Horn
Steering column stalk control
Fuse no.
F 42
F 50
F 27
F 27
F 27
F 27
F 27
F 27
F 26
F 37
F 37
F 31
F 55
F 55
F 55
Ampere
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
10
10
10
30
30
30
Location
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
Fig. 36
F 06
F 06
F 06
F 06
F 07
F 07
F 01
F 17
F 22
F 11
F 10
F 10
40
40
40
40
40
40
60
5
20
10
15
15
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
IN AN EMERGENCY
155
System/Component
Front fog lights
Windscreen wiper motor
Engine cooling fan 2nd speed
Engine control unit 2nd speed
Radiator fan 2nd speed remote switch coil (climate control)
Engine cooling fan 1st speed
Engine control unit 1st speed
Cab fan (climate control)
ABS control unit
Ignition switch
Glow plug preheating
Right-hand dipped beam headlight
Left-hand dipped beam headlight
E.I. system
Fiat code
Automatic gearbox control unit
Fiat code
Compressor
Engine control unit
PTC
Engine control unit
Fuel pump
Engine control unit
Automatic gearbox control unit
Main beam headlights
Windscreen washer pump
156
IN AN EMERGENCY
Fuse no.
Ampere
Location
F 09
F 08
F 07
F 07
F 07
F 06
F 06
F 05
F 04
F 03
F 02
F 14
F 15
F 16
F 16
F 24
F 18
F 19
F 18
F 20
F 11
F 21
F 17
F 23
F 30
F 08
15
30
40/60
40/60
40/60
40
40
30
50
30
50
10
10
7.5
7.5
15
7.5
7.5
7.5
30
10
15
5
10
15
30
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
Fig. 41
IF THE BATTERY
IS FLAT
2) connect the charger cables to the
battery terminals;
3) turn the charger on;
IMPORTANT Battery recharging
procedure is given as information only since this operation shall be only
performed at a Fiat Dealership.
RECHARGING THE BATTERY
You are advised to recharge the battery slowly for a period of approximately 24 hours at a low amperage.
Charging for too long could damage
the battery.
Proceed as follows:
1) disconnect the electrical system
from the battery terminals;
IMPORTANT If the vehicle is fitted with the alarm system, deactivate
it by the remote control (see “Electronic alarm” in chapter “Getting to
know your vehicle”).
4) when you have finished, turn the
charger off before disconnecting the
battery;
5) reconnect the cables to the battery terminals. Make sure the polarity is correct.
WARNING
The liquid in the battery is
poisonous and corrosive.
Do not let it touch the skin or eyes.
Recharging the battery should be
done in a well-ventilated area away
from naked flames or possible
sources of sparks: explosion and fire
risk.
WARNING
Do not attempt to recharge
a frozen battery. Thaw it
first otherwise it could explode. If
the battery froze, make sure the internal elements are not broken
(short-circuit risk) and that the casing is not cracked (risk of spilling
the poisonous and corrosive fluid.
JUMP STARTING
See “Jump starting” in this section.
IN AN EMERGENCY
157
JACKING
THE VEHICLE
WITH THE JACK
See “If a tyre is punctured”, in this
section.
WARNING
The jack should only be
used to change a wheel on
the vehicle for which it was designed. It should not be put to other uses or employed to raise other
models. Under no circumstances
should it be used when carrying out
repairs under the vehicle.
WARNING
WARNING
An incorrectly positioned
jack may cause the vehicle
Never start the engine
when the vehicle is jacked
up.
WARNING
Do not use the jack to lift
loads exceeding that indicated on the label attached to the
jack.
fig. 41
158
IN AN EMERGENCY
If you are towing a trailer,
remove the trailer before
jacking up the vehicle.
Please note:
– the jack requires no adjustments;
– the jack cannot be repaired. If it
breaks it must be replaced with a new
jack;
– no other tool, apart from the extension and the ratchet wrench shown
in section “If a tyre is punctured” can
be fitted to the jack.
F0D0200m
to fall.
WARNING
The vehicle can be raised on a shop
jack if it is empty. This is only possible from the side by placing the jack at
the points provided in the underbody
as indicated in fig. 41.
WITH AN ARM HOIST
The vehicle must be raised by placing the ends of the arms at the points
indicated in fig. 41.
TOWING THE
VEHICLE
WARNING
Before starting to tow, turn
the ignition key to MAR
and then to STOP. Do not remove
the key. If the key is removed, the
steering lock engages automatically which prevents the wheels being
turned.
The vehicle has two eyes for anchoring the tow hitch fig. 42.
A - Front eye
B - Rear eye (for towing another vehicle).
WARNING
F0D0177m
WITH A SHOP JACK
While the vehicle is being
towed with the engine off,
remember that the brake pedal and
steering will require more effort as
you no longer have the benefit of
the power brakes and power steering. Do not use flexible cables to
tow. Avoid jerking. Whilst towing,
ensure that coupling to the vehicle
does not damage the surrounding
components.
fig. 42
IN AN EMERGENCY
159
WARNING
When towing the vehicle
you must comply with the
specific traffic regulations regarding the tow hitch and how to tow
on the road.
VEHICLE WITH AUTOMATIC
GEARBOX
If towing is not due to gearbox faults,
proceed as follows:
– gearshift lever to N;
– do not exceed 50 km/h;
– the vehicle should not be towed
for more than 200 km.
If towing is due to gearbox faults or
the vehicle should be towed for more
than 200 km, tow the vehicle raising
the front wheels from the ground.
160
IN AN EMERGENCY
IF AN ACCIDENT
OCCURS
– It is important to keep calm.
– Call for rescue making the information you give as accurate as you
can.On the motorway use the special
column-mounted emergency phones.
– If you are on a motorway, do not
obstruct the emergency lane with
your vehicle.
– In pile-ups on the motorway, particularly when the visibility is bad,
there is a high risk of other vehicles
running
into
those
already
stopped.Get out of the vehicle immediately and take refuge behind the
guard rail.
– Turn the engine off and the hazard lights on.
– Remove the ignition keys from the
vehicles involved.
– At night, illuminate the scene of the
accident with your headlights.
– If you can smell petrol or other
chemicals, do not smoke and make
sure all cigarettes are extinguished.
– If you are not directly involved in
the accident, stop at least ten metres
away from the accident.
– Act carefully, you must not risk being run over.
– Mark the accident by putting the
red triangle at the regulatory distance
from the vehicle where it can be clearly see.
– If the doors are blocked, do not attempt to smash the windscreen to get
out of the vehicle. It is made of layered
glass and is very hard. Side and rear
windows are much more easily broken.
– Use a fire extinguisher, blanket, sand
or earth to put out fires no matter how
small they are. Never use water.
IF ANYONE IS INJURED
FIRST-AID KIT
– Never leave the injured person
alone. The obligation to provide assistance exists even for those not directly involved in the accident;
It is a good idea to keep a fire extinguisher and blanket in the vehicle in
addition to the first-aid kit.
– Do not congregate around the injured person.
– Reassure the injured person that
help is on its way and will arrive soon.
Stay close by to calm him/her down in
case of panic.
– Unfasten or cut seat belts holding
injured parties.
– Do not give an injured person anything to drink.
– Do not move an injured person unless the following situations arise.
– Pull the injured person from the vehicle only if it risks catching fire, it is
sinking in water or is likely to fall over
a cliff or similar.Do not pull his/her
arms or legs, do not bend the head
and, as far as possible, keep the body
horizontal.
IN AN EMERGENCY
161
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED
SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the vehicle
is essential for ensuring it stays in tiptop condition for a long time to come.
This is why Fiat has programmed a
number of service checks and operations carried out every 30,000 kilometres.
It is however important to remember that "Scheduled Servicing" is not
all your vehicle requires. Regular
checks - also in the initial period before the 30,000 kilometre coupon and
later between coupons - ordinary care
is required, such as checking fluid levels and topping up, checking tyre inflation pressure, checking cleanness of
bonnet and boot locks, cleaning and
lubricating levers, etc...
162
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT The Manufacturer
requires the Service Schedule coupon
related checks to be carried out. Failure to do so could result in the warranty being cancelled for those defects
that can be attributed to such failure.
Scheduled Servicing is performed at
all Fiat Dealerships and there is a set
time scale for such operations.
If it is seen that further replacements
or repairs are necessary in addition to
the work being carried out, these will
only be done after the customer has
given his/her consent.
IMPORTANT You are recommended to get in touch with a Fiat
Dealership immediately if any small
running problems crop up without
waiting for the next coupon.
If the vehicle is frequently used to tow trailers, carry out the scheduled service operations more frequently than shown.
SERVICE SCHEDULE
30
60
90
120
150
180
Check tyre conditions and wear and adjust pressure, if required
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check lighting system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights,
load compartment light, ceiling lights, warning lights, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check windscreen wiper/washer operation, adjust nozzles
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check windscreen/rear window wiper blade position/wear
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check front and rear (where fitted) disc brake pad conditions and wear
●
●
●
●
●
●
thousands of kilometres
●
Check rear drum brake linings conditions and wear (where fitted)
Inspect conditions and soundness of:
– outer bodywork and underbody protection;
– piping (exhaust - fuel feed and brakes)
– rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushings, etc.)
– fuel feed and braking system hosing
●
Check tension and conditions of various control belts and adjust, if required
(excluding engines with automatic belt tighteners)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check accelerator pedal stroke and adjust, if required
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check handbrake lever stroke and adjust, if required
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check tappet clearance and adjust, if required (2.8 JTD version)
Check tappet clearance and adjust, if required (petrol versions)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check exhaust emissions
●
●
●
●
●
●
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
163
thousands of kilometres
30
90
●
Replace fuel filter cartridge (Diesel versions)
Replace air cleaner cartridge (Diesel versions)
60
●
●
120
150
●
●
●
180
●
●
●
Replace air cleaner cartridge (petrol versions)
●
●
●
Replace spark plugs (petrol versions)
●
●
●
Top up fluids (engine coolant, brakes, power steering,
battery, windscreen washer, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check timing belt conditions (***)
●
●
Replace timing belt and various control belts
(or every 48 months) (*)
●
Check engine control systems via diagnostic socket
●
●
●
●
●
●
Change gearbox - transmission - rear axle oil (4WD version)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check gearbox/differential oil level (automatic transmission)
●
●
Change engine oil (**)
●
●
●
●
●
●
Replace engine oil filter (**)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)
Replace pollen filter (or every 12 months)
(*)
●
●
Replace every 240,000 km or every 60 months for 2.3 JTD versions.
(**) Change/replace engine oil filter and oil every 40,000 km for 2.3 JTD versions
(***) Every 120,000 km for 2.3 JTD versions
164
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
●
●
●
●
●
●
ANNUAL
INSPECTION
SCHEDULE
The following annual inspection
schedule is required for vehicles travelling 15,000 Km approx. a year. The
schedule includes the following operations:
– check tyre condition and wear and
adjust pressure, if required (including
spare wheel);
– check operation of lights (headlights, direction indicators, hazard
lights, boot light, passenger compartment light, instrument panel lights,
etc.);
– check windscreen wiper/washer
and adjust nozzles;
– check position and wear of windscreen/rear window wiper blades;
– check front pad conditions and
wear;
– check for bonnet and boot lock
cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication;
– inspect conditions of: engine, gearbox, transmission, piping (exhaust, fuel feed, brakes), rubber parts (boots,
sleeves, bushings, etc.), brake and fuel line hoses;
– check battery charge status;
– check conditions of various control
belts;
– check and top up fluid levels (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen
washer, battery, etc.);
– check and top up engine oil;
– replace pollen filter.
ADDITIONAL
CHECKS
Every 1,000 km or before long
trips, check and top up as necessary:
– engine coolant level
– brake fluid level
– power steering fluid level
– battery electrolyte level
– windscreen washer fluid
– tyre pressure and conditions.
Every 3,000 km or before long
trips, check and top up as necessary:
engine oil
Every 10,000 km or at c warning
light coming on (diesel engines only):
bleed water from fuel filter.
You are recommended to use FL
Selenia products designed and produced for Fiat vehicles (see the “Capacities” table in the “Technical Specifications” section).
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
165
IMPORTANT - Engine oil
IMPORTANT - Pollen filter
Change the engine oil more frequently than shown in the Service
Schedule if the vehicle is normally driven in one of the following particularly severe conditions:
If the vehicle is often used in dusty
or extremely polluted environments,
you should change the filter element
more frequently. It should be changed
especially if the amount of air introduced into the passenger compartment has decreased.
– towing a trailer
– on dusty roads
– short distances (less than 7-8 km)
repeated and with external temperatures below zero.
– frequently idling engines or long
distance low speed driving (e. g. taxis
or door-to-door deliveries) or in case
of a long term inactivity replace engine
oil more frequently than required on
Scheduled Maintenance Plan.
IMPORTANT - Air cleaner
Replace the air cleaner more frequently if the vehicle is used on dusty
roads.
If you are in doubt about how often
the engine oil or the air cleaner should
be changed in relation to how you use
the vehicle, contact a Fiat Dealership.
166
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT - Diesel filter
Refuelling with diesel fuel not complying with the grade of purity prescribed by European Specification
EN590 might make it necessary to replace the filter more frequently than
indicated in the Service Schedule.
IMPORTANT - Battery
The charge in your battery should be
checked, where possible at the start
of the winter, to limit the risk of the
battery electrolyte freezing.
This check should be carried out
more frequently if the vehicle is mainly
used for short trips or if it is fitted
with accessories that permanently
take in electricity even when the ignition key is removed, especially in the
case of after market accessories.
You should check the battery fluid
(electrolyte) level more frequently
than shown in the Service Schedule if
the vehicle is used in hot climates or
particularly demanding conditions.
IMPORTANT As concerns Camping Car versions, due to high electric
absorption, observe indications relevant to battery contained in paragraphs "Vehicle storage" (section
"Getting the best out of your vehicle")
and "Battery – Checking the charge"
(section "Vehicle maintenance").
Maintenance of your vehicle should be entrusted
to a Fiat Dealership. For
ordinary routine maintenance
operations which you are able to
carry out yourself, ensure that
you have the necessary tools and
original Fiat spare parts and fluids available. Do not carry out
servicing operations if you have
no experience.
F0D0102m
CHECKING
FLUID LEVELS
WARNING
Do not smoke while working in the engine compartment: the presence of flammable
gas and vapour could cause a fire.
WARNING
fig. 1 - Petrol engine versions
F0D0103m
Scarves, ties and other
loose articles of clothing
could easily get caught up in moving parts. This can be extremely
dangerous for the wearer.
Be careful not to mix up
the various types of fluids
when you are topping up:
they are mutually incompatible
and could damage the vehicle.
1. Engine oil - 2. Battery - 3. Brake fluid 4. Windscreen washer fluid - 5. Engine
coolant - 6. Power steering fluid
fig. 2 - 2.0 JTD versions
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
167
F0D0210m
1. Engine oil - 2. Battery - 3. Brake fluid 4. Windscreen washer fluid - 5. Engine
coolant - 6. Power steering fluid
F0D0182m
fig. 3 - 2.3 JTD versions
1. Engine oil - 2. Battery - 3. Brake fluid 4. Windscreen washer fluid - 5. Engine
coolant - 6. Power steering fluid
fig. 4 - 2.8 JTD - 2.8 JTD POWER versions
168
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Fig. 5: 2.0 versions
Fig. 6: 2.0 JTD versions
Fig. 7: 2.3 JTD versions
Fig. 8: 2.8 JTD - 2.8 JTD POWER
versions
Check engine oil with the vehicle on
level ground and while the engine is
still warm (approximately 10 minutes
after stopping the engine). The oil
level should be included between the
MIN and MAX reference lines on
the dipstick.
The gap between MIN and MAX
reference lines corresponds to approximately 2 litres oil.
The oil level must never exceed the
MAX line.
Be very careful under the
bonnet: you risk burning
yourself. Remember that when the
engine is hot, the fan can start up
and cause injuries.
F0D0211m
If the oil level is near or even below
the MIN line, pour in oil through the
filler hole until it reaches the MAX
line.
Do not add oil with different specifications from
the oil already in the engine.
fig. 6
F0D0183m
F0D0064m
fig. 7
F0D0063m
fig. 5
IMPORTANT After topping up or
changing the oil, let the engine turn
for a few seconds and wait a few minutes after stopping it before you check
the level.
WARNING
fig. 8
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
169
ENGINE COOLANT
Maximum engine oil consumption is
approx. 450 grams every 1000 Km.
During the beginning of the vehicle’s
life the engine is tuning in. Engine oil
consumption can only be considered
stabilised after the first 5,000 - 6,000
km.
IMPORTANT Engine oil consumption depends on the conditions the vehicle is being used in.
Used engine oil and replaced oil filters contain
substances which can
harm the environment. We recommend you have the vehicle
seen at a Fiat Dealership for the
oil and filter change. It is suitably
equipped for disposing of used oil
and filters in an environmentallyfriendly way that complies with
the law.
170
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Do not remove the reservoir
cap when the engine is hot:
you risk scalding yourself.
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurised. If necessary, replace the cap with a genuine spare
part to avoid compromising the system efficiency.
tions”, until the level approaches the
MAX line; contact Fiat Dealership
for this operation.
Coolant mixture gives freeze protection to – 40°C.
Top up only with the
same fluid contained in
the
cooling
circuit.
PARAFLU UP (red) cannot be
mixed with PARAFLU 11 (blue)
or with other fluids. Should this
take place, donot start the engine
and contact Fiat Dealership.
F0D0065m
Engine oil consumption
Check coolant level when the engine
is cold. The level should be included
between the MIN and MAX reference lines on the reservoir.
If the level is low, loosen the expansion tank cap A-fig. 9 and top up
slowly through the filler with the fluid specified in “Fluids and lubricants”
table in section “Technical Specifica-
fig. 9
WINDSCREEN WASHER
FLUID
WARNING
Do not travel with the windscreen washer reservoir
empty. The windscreen washer is
fundamental for improving visibility.
To add fluid, remove cap A-fig. 10
from the reservoir and slowly pour in
a mixture of water and TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC35 fluid in the
following concentrations:
– 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35 and 70% of water in
summer.
– 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC35 and 50% of water in
winter.
Oil consumption is extremely low. If the oil
level needs topping up
again after a short period of
time, have the system checked
for leakage at a Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
Some windscreen washer
additives on the market are
flammable. The engine compartment contains hot parts which
could ignite the fluid in the event of
contact.
If the temperature falls below –20°C,
use TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC35 undiluted.
WARNING
Do not let the power steering fluid come into contact
with hot engine parts. It catches fire
very easily.
Check the oil level when the engine
is cold. It should be slightly under the
reference line on the reservoir.
F0D0066m
F0D0068m
POWER STEERING
FLUID
When the oil is hot, the level can exceed the reference line.
When topping up, remove the reservoir cap A-fig. 11 and make sure that
the oil has the same specifications as
the oil in the system.
fig. 10
fig. 11
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
171
BRAKE FLUID
Make sure that the
highly corrosive brake
fluid does not drip onto
the paintwork. If it does, wash it
off immediately with water.
Loosen plug A-fig. 12 and check
that the level of the fluid in the reservoir is at the maximum
Check at regular intervals that the
level of the fluid in the reservoir is at
the maximum.
Use only DOT 4 fluid only for topping up. We recommend TUTELA
TOP 4 that the braking system was
originally filled with.
F0D0067m
172
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
The symbol π on the container indicates synthetic
brake fluid distinguishing it from
mineral fluid. Using mineral type
fluid would damage the special rubber braking system gaskets beyond
repair.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous
and very corrosive. In the
event of accidental contact, wash
the affected part with water and
mild soap and rinse. If the fluid is
swallowed, call a doctor immediately.
fig. 12
WARNING
IMPORTANT Brake fluid is hygroscopic (meaning it absorbs humidity). This is why the fluid should be
changed more frequently than shown
in the Service Schedule if the vehicle
is mainly driven in areas with a high
percentage of humidity in the air.
AIR CLEANER
POLLEN FILTER
DIESEL FILTER
REPLACEMENT
Have the filter changed at the frequency specified in the Service Schedule.
DRAINING THE
CONDENSATION
Unscrew the screws A-fig. 13 and
remove cap B.
Have the change made at a Fiat
Dealership.
F0D0295m
Remove the filtering element Cfig. 14 to be replaced.
F0D0070m
fig. 13
IMPORTANT If the vehicle is often used in dusty or extremely polluted environments, you should
change the filter more frequently. It
should be changed especially if the
amount of air introduced into the passenger compartment has decreased.
The presence of water in
the fuel feed circuit can
severely damage the injection system and make the engine misfire. Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible when the
c warning light comes on to have
the bleeding operation carried
out. If the warning light comes on
immediately after refuelling, water is probably present in the
tank: turn the engine off immediately and contact Fiat Dealership.
fig. 14
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
173
BATTERY
REPLACING THE BATTERY
Fiat Ducato battery is of the “Limited maintenance” and is fitted with indicator A-fig. 15 to check the electrolyte level and the charge.
Under normal conditions of use it
does not require topping up with distilled water. However, check it periodically through the control optical indicator that is placed on the battery
cover and must be dark with a central green area.
F0D0244m
If the indicator is a bright colour, or
dark without the green central area,
contact a Fiat Dealership.
fig. 15
174
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
WARNING
If required, replace the battery with
a genuine spare part presenting the
same specifications. If a battery with
different specifications is fitted, the frequencies shown in the “Service Schedule” will no longer be valid. Refer to
the instructions provided by the battery manufacturer.
The liquid in the battery is
poisonous and corrosive.
Do not let it touch the skin or eyes.
Do not bring naked flames or possible sources or sparks near the battery: risk of fire and explosion.
Batteries contain substances that are very
harmful for the environment. You are advised to have the
battery changed at a Fiat Dealership. It is properly equipped for
disposing of used batteries in an
environmentally-friendly way that
complies with the law.
Incorrect fitting of electrical and electronic accessories can seriously
damage the vehicle. If you want
to add accessories after buying
the vehicle antitheft system, radio, free-hand phone kit, etc.) visit a Fiat Dealership. They can suggest the most suitable accessories to get and check whether
the electric system can support
the required load or whether a
higher capacity battery is required.
WARNING
If the vehicle is to stand for
a long time in the cold, remove the battery and store it in a
warm place to avoid it freezing.
CHECKING THE CHARGE
The battery charge may be checked
satisfactorily through the indicator and
acting according to the colour the indicator shows.
Refer to the table below or to the label B-fig. 15 on the battery.
WARNING
When working on the battery or near it, always wear
the proper goggles.
USEFUL ADVICE FOR
LENGTHENING THE LIFE OF
YOUR BATTERY
When you park the vehicle, ensure
the doors are closed properly. The
ceiling lights must be off.
Do not keep accessories (e.g.: sound
system, hazard lights, etc.) switched
on for a long time when the engine is
not running.
IMPORTANT A battery which is
kept at a charge of less than 50% for
any length of time will be damaged by
sulphation leading to a reduction in
cranking power and a higher risk of the
battery electrolyte freezing (this may
even occur at –10 °C).
WARNING
Running the battery with
low fluid level can damage
the battery beyond repair and
could also cause its explosion.
Bright
white colour
Dark colour without green
area in the centre
Dark colour with green
area in the centre
Top up electrolyte
Low charge level
Electrolyte level
and charge sufficient
Contact a
Fiat Dealership
Charge the battery
(advisable to contact a Fiat
Dealership)
No action
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
175
If the vehicle is inactive for a long period of time, refer to the “Vehicle storage” paragraph in section “Getting the
best out of you vehicle”.
Before performing any operation on
the electrical system, disconnect the
battery negative cable.
Battery terminals shall always be
perfectly separated.
If you want to add accessories after
buying the vehicle (antitheft system,
free-hand phone kit, radio navigator,
etc.) visit a Fiat Dealership. They
can suggest the most suitable accessories to get and check whether the
electric system can support the
required load or whether a higher
capacity battery is required.
These devices will, in fact, run off
the battery even when the key is not
inserted (vehicle parked, engine off).
176
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
The total intake of these systems
(factory and after-market) must be
less than 0.6 mA x Ah (of the battery) as shown in the following table:
Battery
Maximum
admitted stand-by
intake
60 Ah
36 mA
88 Ah
52.8 mA
100 Ah
60 mA
Furthermore, remember that high intake electric devices (such as baby bottle warmers, vacuum cleaners, cellular
phones, mini-fridges, etc.) powered
when the engine is off can deploy
the battery.
IMPORTANT When installing additional systems on the vehicle, bear
in mind that improper branches on
connections of the vehicle wiring are
dangerous, particularly if safety devices
are involved.
When the vehicle is being used normally, special measures are not necessary.
The following instructions must be
followed very carefully however, if
you work on the electrical system or
in cases where emergency starting is
necessary:
– never disconnect the battery from
the electric system while the engine is
running;
– disconnect the battery from the
electric system if you are recharging it;
– never perform emergency starting
with a battery charger. Always use an
auxiliary battery;
– be particularly careful when connecting the battery to the electric system. Make sure that the polarity is
correct and that the connection is efficient;
– do not connect or disconnect the
terminals of the electronic units while
the ignition key is at MAR;
– do not check polarity through
sparking;
– disconnect the electronic control
units if you are electrically welding the
vehicle body. Remove the units if temperatures exceed 80 °C (special operations on the bodywork, etc.).
SPEED LIMITER
On certain version, the injection control unit is set to limit the vehicle
speed at a max. preset limit.
Speed limits are the following:
IMPORTANT If the sound system
or vehicle alarm systems are not installed correctly, they can interfere
with the working of the electronic
control units.
– for Minibus versions (M2 homologation category): 100 km/h;
– for good Transport versions (vehicle dead weight: > 3.5 t) (N2 homologation category): 90 km/h;
WARNING
Label (fig.16) with admitted top
speed (90 or 100 km/h according to
versions) is applied on the windscreen.
Modifications or repairs to
the electrical system carried out incorrectly and without
bearing the features of the system
in mind can cause malfunctions
with the risk of fire.
This limit has been established by European Directive 2002/85/EC, whatever violation is therefore punishable
by law.
F0D0299m
ELECTRONIC
CONTROL UNIT
IMPORTANT When the device
comes into action, the speed value
displayed on the instrument panel
could be approx. 10% higher than the
actual one.
fig. 16
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
177
Check the pressure of each tyre, including the spare, every two weeks
and before long journeys.
The pressure must be checked when
the tyre is rested and cold.
It is normal for pressure to rise
when you are driving. If you have to
check or restore the pressure when
the tyres are warm, remember that
the pressure value must be 0.3 bar
above the specified value.
See “Wheels” in “Technical specifications” chapter for the correct tyre
inflation pressure.
Wrong pressure causes uneven
wear of the tyres fig. 17:
IMPORTANT As far as possible
avoid sharp braking and screech starts.
A - correct pressure: tyre wears
evenly
Be careful not to hit the kerb, potholes or other obstacles. Driving for
long stretches over bumpy roads can
damage the tyres.
B - under-inflated tyre: shoulder
tread wear
WARNING
If the pressure is too low,
the tyre overheats and this
can cause it serious damage.
WARNING
fig. 17
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Avoid overloading your vehicle: this
can seriously damage wheels or tyres.
If you get a flat tyre, stop immediately and change it so as not to damage the tyre, the wheel, the suspension and the steering.
Tyres must be replaced when the
tread wears down to 1.6 mm. In any
case, comply with the laws in the country where the vehicle is being driven.
Tyre pressure must be correct to ensure good road
holding.
178
Periodically check that the tyres have
no cuts in the side wall, abnormal
swelling or irregular tyre wear. If any
of these occur, have the vehicle seen
to at a Fiat Dealership.
C - over-inflated tyre: centre tread
wear.
F0D0027m
WHEELS AND
TYRES
Tyres age even if they are not used
very much. Cracking of the tread rubber and the side walls are a sign of this
ageing. In any case, if the tyres have
been fitted for more than six years
they should be examined by an expert
who can judge whether they are still
fit for use. Remember to check the
spare tyre particularly carefully too.
To ensure the front and rear tyres all
wear evenly, you are advised to change
the tyres over every 10 - 15 thousand
kilometres keeping them on the same
side of the vehicle so as not to reverse
the direction of rotation.
If a replacement is necessary, always
use new tyres and avoid using ones
the origin of which you are not certain about.
Do not change the tyres
over in criss-cross fashion
by moving a tyre from the left-hand
side of the vehicle to the right and
vice versa.
The Ducato uses tubeless tyres. Under no circumstances use an inner
tube with these tyres.
If you replace a tyre it is a good idea
to change the inflation valve, too.
WARNING
RUBBER TUBING
Follow the Service Schedule carefully
in the case of braking and fuel supply
system rubber tubing.
Ozone, high temperatures and long
absence of fluid in the system can in
fact cause the hardening and cracking
of the pipes with possible loss of fluid.
A careful check is therefore essential.
WARNING
Never submit alloy rims to
repainting treatments requiring to use temperatures exceeding 150°C since the mechanical properties of the wheels could
be impaired.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
179
WINDSCREEN
WIPER
Some simple steps can reduce potential damage to the blades:
Changing the windscreen
wiper blade
BLADES
– if the temperature falls to below
zero, make sure the rubber blade is
not frozen to the windscreen. If necessary, free it with a de-icing compound;
1) Lift windscreen wiper arm Afig. 18 off the glass and position the
blade so as to form a right angle with
the arm.
Periodically clean the rubber part
with suitable products. We recommend TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC35.
Change the blades if the rubber edge
is warped or worn out. You should in
any case change them approximately
once a year.
– remove any snow that has settled
on the glass: besides saving the blades
you will avoid straining the electric
windscreen wiper motor and causing
it to overheat;
– do not operate the windscreen or
rear window wipers on dry glass.
2) Press tab B on the retainer and
remove the blade to be replaced from
arm A .
3) Fit the new blade by inserting the
tab into the special slot in the arm.
Make sure it is properly locked into
place.
WARNING
F0D0123m
Travelling with worn wiper
blades is dangerous because it reduces visibility in bad
weather.
fig. 18
180
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
SPRAY NOZZLES
Windscreen washer
If there is no jet of liquid, first make
sure that there is liquid in the reservoir: see “Checking fluid levels” in this
section. Then make sure that the
holes in the nozzles are not clogged
up fig. 19. Use a pin to open the nozzles if necessary. The windscreen jets
are directed by adjusting the inclination of nozzles. Direct the spray so
that it reaches the highest point
reached by the brushes.
Headlight washer
BODYWORK
If there is no jet of liquid, first make
sure that there is liquid in the reservoir. Then make sure that the holes
in the nozzles fig. 20 are not clogged
up. Use a pin to open the nozzles if
necessary.
PROTECTING THE VEHICLE
FROM ATMOSPHERIC
AGENTS
The main causes of rust are:
– atmospheric pollution;
– salt and humidity in the atmosphere (coastal or very hot and humid
areas);
– environmental conditions that are
specific to the season.
F0D0122m
F0D0125m
In addition, the abrasiveness of dust
in the atmosphere and sand carried by
the wind as well as mud and stones
kicked up by other vehicles must not
be underestimated.
For your vehicle, Fiat has used leading-edge technological solutions to effectively protect the body from rust.
These are the most important:
– painting systems and products that
make the vehicle particularly resistant
to rust and scratching;
fig. 19
fig. 20
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
181
– the use of zinc-plated sheet steel
which is highly resistant to rust;
– the spraying of the underbody, engine compartment, inside the wheelhouses and other parts with waxbased products with a high protective
capacity;
TIPS FOR KEEPING THE BODY
IN GOOD CONDITIONS
Paintwork
The paintwork is not only to make
your vehicle look attractive but also
to protect the steel.
– spraying plastic-coating materials
to protect the most exposed points:
under the door, inside the wings, the
edges, etc.;
If the paint is scuffed or scratched
deeply you are therefore advised to
touch up as necessary to prevent rust
from forming.
– the use of “open” box sections to
prevent condensation and water from
building up and rusting the inside of
the parts.
Only use genuine products when
touching up the paintwork (see section “Technical Specifications”).
BODY AND UNDERBODY
WARRANTY
Your Ducato is covered by warranty
against any original structural or body
part being perforated by rust. Refer to
the Warranty Booklet for the general
terms.
Ordinary maintenance of the paintwork means washing it. The frequency
you should do this depends on the
conditions and the environment the
vehicle is driven in.
For example:
– areas with a high level of air-pollution;
– roads sprinkled with road saltwash;
– parking under trees which drop
resin. In these cases, wash your vehicle more frequently.
182
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
To wash the vehicle properly:
1) wash the body using a low pressure jet of water;
2) wipe a sponge with a slightly
soapy solution over the bodywork,
frequently rinsing the sponge;
3) rinse well with water and dry
with a jet of air or a chamois leather.
When drying the vehicle, be careful
to get at those parts which are not so
easily seen, e.g. the door frames, bonnet and around the headlights where
water can most readily collect. You
should leave the vehicle out in the
open so that any water remaining can
evaporate more easily.
Do not wash the vehicle after it has
been parked in the sun or while the
bonnet is hot: it could take the shine
off the paint.
To better protect the paintwork,
polish with protective wax from time
to time, that leaves a protective layer
on the paintwork.
Outside plastic parts must be
cleaned following the usual vehicle
washing procedure.
When the paintwork tends to lose
its shine because of the build-up of
smog, use a wax (polish) which has a
slightly abrasive as well as protective
action.
Where possible avoid parking the
vehicle under trees; the resinous substances that certain species of tree
shed dull the paintwork and increase
the possibility of rust forming.
Detergents pollute water. For this reason, the
vehicle must be washed
in an area equipped for the collection and purification of the liquids used while washing.
IMPORTANT Bird droppings
must be washed off immediately and
with great care as their acid is particularly aggressive.
Front headlights
Engine compartment
At the end of each winter season,
carefully clean the engine compartment. Have this done at a garage.
IMPORTANT The engine compartment should be washed while the
engine is cold and with the ignition key
at STOP. After washing, make sure
that the various protections (e.g. rubber boots and various guards) have
not be removed or damaged.
IMPORTANT Never use aromatic substances (e.g.: petrol) or ketones
(e.g.: acetone) for cleaning front headlight plastic lens.
Windows
Use specific window cleaners to
clean the windows. Use very clean
cloths to avoid scratching the glass or
damaging its transparency.
IMPORTANT To prevent damage
to the electric heater element, wipe
the inside of the heated rear window
(where fitted) gently in the same direction as the elements.
Detergents pollute water. The vehicle must
therefore be washed in an
area equipped for the collection
and purification of the liquids
used while washing.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
183
INTERIORS
From time to time check that water
has not collected under the mats
(from dripping shoes, umbrellas, etc.)
which could cause the steel to rust.
WARNING
Do not keep aerosol cans in
the vehicle. There is the risk
they might explode. Aerosol cans
must never be exposed to a temperature above 50°C; when the
weather starts to get hot the temperature inside the vehicle might go
well beyond that figure.
CLEANING SEATS
AND FABRICS
Remove dust with a soft brush and
vacuum cleaner. For velvet seats use
a damp brush.
Brush the seats with a damp sponge
with water and neutral soap.
184
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Clean plastic parts with damp cloth
with water and non-abrasive neutral
soap. To remove grease or hard
stains, use special solvent-free products designed not to alter the appearance and colour of components.
IMPORTANT Do not use alcohol
or petrol to clean the instrument
panel.
WARNING
Never use flammable products (petroleum ether or
petrol) to clean the inside of the vehicle. Electrostatic charges generated by rubbing while cleaning
could cause fires.
PLASTIC PARTS INSIDE
THE VEHICLE
T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
VEHICLE
IDENTIFICATION
DATA
ENGINE MARKING
MODEL PLATE
The marking is stamped on the cylinder block and includes the model and
the serial number.
The model plate fig. 2 includes the
following identification data:
See the following pages for the engine codes together with the bodywork codes.
CHASSIS MARKING fig. 1
This is stamped on the wheelhouse
near the passenger seat. It can be
reached by lifting the special plastic
flap in the carpeting over the wheel
arch and it includes:
A - Manufacturer’s name
B - Homologation number
C - Vehicle type code
D - Vehicle ID code (Chassis serial
number)
– vehicle model ZFA 244.000
fig. 1
F0D0026m
F0D0126m
– chassis serial number.
fig. 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
185
E - Maximum vehicle weight fully
loaded
BODYWORK PAINT
IDENTIFICATION PLATE
It bears the following data fig. 5:
F - Maximum vehicle weight fully
loaded with trailer
The plate A-fig. 4 is set on the lefthand inner side of the bonnet.
B - Colour name
A - Paint manufacturer
C - Fiat colour code
G - Maximum vehicle weight on
front axle
D - Respray and touch up code.
H - Maximum vehicle weight on rear
axle
I - Engine type
L - Body version code
M - Smoke opacity index (for diesel
engines).
fig. 3
186
fig. 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
F0D0025m
F0D0189m
F0D0188m
This plate is fastened to the front
crossmember in the engine compartment A-fig. 3.
fig. 5
ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS
Version 11
Engine
Van short wheelbase
Van short wheelbase
Van medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Truck medium wheelbase
Truck short wheelbase
Chassis cab short wheelbase
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab medium wheelbase
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car
Transport ambulance short wheelbase
Panorama short wheelbase
Combi 6 seater short wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase Camping Car
Van short wheelbase
Van short wheelbase
Van medium wheelbase
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
Engine
code
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RHV
RHV
RHV
Bodywork
version
244ATMFA AX
244ATMFA BX
244ATMFB AX
244ATMNB AX
244ATMNB BX
244ATMDB AX
244ATMDA AX
244ATMAA AX
244ATMAA AXC
244ATMAB AX
244ATMAB AXC
244ATMTA AX
244ATMPA 00
244ATMRA 01
244ATMCA AX
244ATMCA AXC
244ATMCB AX
244ATMCB AXC
244AAMFA AX
244AAMFA BX
244AAMFB AX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
187
Version 11
Engine
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Chassis cab short wheelbase
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car
Truck short wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cowl short wheelbase
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab medium wheelbase
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car
Truck medium wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase Camping Car
Panorama short wheelbase
Combi 6 seater short wheelbase
Combi short wheelbase low roof
Combi medium wheelbase low roof
Chassis cowl short wheelbase “city centre”
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase “city centre”
Truck short wheelbase “city centre”
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase “city centre”
Truck medium wheelbase “city centre”
Van short wheelbase low roof “city centre”
Van short wheelbase high roof “city centre”
Van medium wheelbase low roof “city centre”
Van medium wheelbase high sided “city centre”
Van medium wheelbase extra high “city centre”
Van short wheelbase low roof (9 q)
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
188
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
code
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
Bodywork
version
244AAMNB AX
244AAMNB BX
244AAMAA AX
244AAMAA AXC
244AAMDA AX
244AAMCA AX
244AAMCA AXC
244AAMBA AX
244AAMBA AXC
244AAMAB AX
244AAMAB AXC
244AAMDB AX
244AAMCB AX
244AAMCB AXC
244AAMPA 02
244AAMRA 03
244AAMFA ZX
244AAMRB 26
244AAMRA 03
244DAMBA AX
244DAMCA AX
244DAMDA AX
244DAMCB AX
244DAMDB AX
244DAMFA AX
244DAMFA BX
244DAMFB AX
244DAMNB AX
244DAMNB BX
Version 11
Engine
Van short wheelbase high roof (9 q)
Van medium wheelbase low roof (9 q)
Van medium wheelbase high sided (9 q)
Van medium wheelbase extra high (9 q)
Van short wheelbase low roof without EGR (9 q)
Van short wheelbase high roof without EGR (9 q)
Van short wheelbase high sided without EGR (9 q)
Van short wheelbase extra high without EGR (9 q)
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van short wheelbase
Van short wheelbase
Van medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van long wheelbase high sided without EGR
Van long wheelbase extra high without EGR
Transport ambulance short wheelbase
Panorama short wheelbase
Combi 6 seater short wheelbase
Combi short wheelbase
Combi medium wheelbase
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van short wheelbase
Van short wheelbase
Van medium wheelbase
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244EAMFA AX
244EAMFA BX
244EAMNB AX
244EAMNB BX
244ESMFA AY
244ESMFA BY
244ESMNB AY
244ESMNB BY
244ASMFA AY
244ASMFA BY
244ASMFA AX
244ASMFA BX
244ASMFB AY
244ASMNB AY
244ASMNB BY
244ASMNC AY
244ASMNC BY
244ASMTA AX
244ASMPA 04
244ASMRA 05
244ASMFA ZX
244ASMRB 31
244APMFA AY
244APMFA BY
244APMFB AY
244APMNB AY
244APMNB BY
244APMFA AX
244APMFA BX
244APMFB AX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
189
Version 15
Engine
Combi short wheelbase automatic gearbox low roof
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Ambulance van short wheelbase low roof without EGR
Transport ambulance short wheelbase
Panorama short wheelbase
Panorama short wheelbase automatic gearbox
Combi 6 seater short wheelbase
Combi short wheelbase
Van short wheelbase
Van short wheelbase
Van medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided long wheelbase
Van high sided long wheelbase
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab Camping Car
Chassis cab short wheelbase
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab medium wheelbase
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab long wheelbase
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car
Truck short wheelbase
Truck medium wheelbase
Truck long wheelbase
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
190
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
code
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
Bodywork
version
244APARA 30
244APMNB AX
244APMNB BX
244ALMFA AY
244APMTA AX
244APMPA 06
244APAPA 07
244APMRA 08
244APMFA ZX
244BTMFA AX
244BTMFA BX
244BTMFB AX
244BTMNB AX
244BTMNB BX
244BTMNC AX
244BTMNC BX
244BTMHB AX
244BTMHB AXC
244BTMAA AX
244BTMAA AXC
244BTMAB AX
244BTMAB AXC
244BTMAC AX
244BTMAC AXC
244BTMDA AX
244BTMDB AX
244BTMDC AX
Version 15
Engine
Truck medium wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab Camping Car
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase Camping Car
Transport ambulance medium wheelbase
Aid ambulance medium wheelbase
Panorama medium wheelbase
Combi 6 seater medium wheelbase
Combi 6 seater medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase Bipower
Van high sided medium wheelbase Bipower (extra high)
Van high sided medium wheelbase petrol/LPG
Van high sided medium wheelbase petrol/LPG (extra high)
Van high sided long wheelbase Bipower
Van high sided long wheelbase Bipower (extra high)
Van high sided long wheelbase petrol/LPG
Van high sided long wheelbase petrol/LPG (extra high)
Van short wheelbase
Van short wheelbase
Van medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
Engine
code
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
Bodywork
version
244BTMGB AX
244BTMHC AX
244BTMHC AXC
244BTMCC AX
244BTMCC AXC
244BTMCA AX
244BTMCA AXC
244BTMCB AX
244BTMCB AXC
244BTMTB AX
244BTMSB AX
244BTMPB 09
244BTMRB 10
244BTMRB 10B
244BTMNB AM
244BTMNB BM
244BTM NB AG
244BTMNB BG
244BTMNC AM
244BTMNC BM
244BTMNC AG
244BTMNC BG
244BAMFA AX
244BAMFA BX
244BAMFB AX
244BAMNB AX
244BAMNB BX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
191
Version 11
Engine
Van long wheelbase high sided without EGR
Van long wheelbase extra high without EGR
Chassis cab short wheelbase
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car
Truck short wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cowl short wheelbase
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab medium wheelbase
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car
Truck medium wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase Camping Car
Truck medium wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab Camping Car
Chassis cab long wheelbase
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car
Truck long wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cowl long wheelbase
Chassis cowl long wheelbase Camping Car
Truck long wheelbase crew cab
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
192
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
code
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
RHV
Bodywork
version
244BAMNC AX
244BAMNC BX
244BAMAA AX
244BAMAA AXC
244BAMDA AX
244BAMCA AX
244BAMCA AXC
244BAMBA AX
244BAMBA AXC
244BAMAB AX
244BAMAB AXC
244BAMDB AX
244BAMCB AX
244BAMCB AXC
244BAMBB AX
244BAMBB AXC
244BAMGB AX
244BAMHB AX
244BAMHB AXC
244BAMAC AX
244BAMAC AXC
244BAMDC AX
244BAMCC AX
244BAMCC AXC
244BAMBC AX
244BAMBC AXC
244BAMGC AX
Version 15
Engine
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab Camping Car
Combi 6 seater medium wheelbase
Combi medium wheelbase high sided
Panorama medium wheelbase high sided
Ambulance van medium wheelbase high sided
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided long wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase special
Camping car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase special
Camping car without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.0 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
Engine
code
RHV
RHV
RHV
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
Bodywork
version
244BAMHC AX
244BAMHC AXC
244BAMRB 11
244BAMRB 11C
244BAMPB 27
244BSMNB AX
244BSMFA AY
244BSMFA BY
244BSMFB AY
244BSMNB AY
244BSMNB BY
244BSMNB AX
244BSMNC AY
244BSMNC BY
244BSMAA AY
244BSMAA AYC
244BSMDA AY
244BSMCA AY
244BSMCA AYC
244BSMCA BYC
244BSMCB BYC
2.3 JTD
F1AE0481C
244BSMCC BYC
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
244BSMBA AY
244BSMBA AYC
244BSMBA BYC
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
193
Version 15
Engine
Chassis cab medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
194
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
Engine
code
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
Bodywork
version
244BSMAB AY
244BSMAB AYC
244BSMDB AY
244BSMCB AY
244BSMCB AYC
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
244BSMBB AY
244BSMBB AYC
244BSMBB BYC
244BSMAC AY
244BSMAC AYC
244BSMDC AY
244BSMCC AY
244BSMCC AYC
244BSMBC AY
244BSMBC AYC
244BSMBC BYC
244BSMAG AY
244BSMAGAYC
244BSMDG AY
244BSMBG AY
244BSMBG AYC
244BSMBG BYC
244BSMHB AY
244BSMHB AYC
244BSMHG AY
244BSMHG AYC
244BSMDG AY
244BSMGG AY
Version 15
Engine
Truck medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
Truck long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Transport ambulance medium wheelbase
Aid ambulance medium wheelbase
Panorama medium wheelbase
Combi 6 seater medium wheelbase
Combi 6 seater medium wheelbase
Combi medium wheelbase
Combi high sided medium wheelbase
Chassis cab short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided long wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab short wheelbase without EGR
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244BSMGB AY
244BSMHC AY
244BSMHC AYC
244BSMGC AY
244BSMTB AX
244BSMSB AX
244BSMPB 12
244BSMRB 13
244BSMRB 13B
244BSMFB ZX
244BSMNB ZX
244BSMAABYC
244BSMBA BYC
244BSMAB BYC
244BSMBB BYC
244BSMAC BYC
244BSMBC BYC
244BSMAG BYC
244BSMBG BYC
244BPMFA AY
244BPMFA BY
244BPMFB AY
244BPMNB AY
244BPMNB BY
244BPMNC AY
244BPMNC BY
244BPMAA AY
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
195
Version 11
Engine
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase low roof automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase low roof
Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase special
Camping car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase special
Camping car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase special
Camping car without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase without EGR
196
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244BPMAA AYC
244BPMDA AY
244BPMAB AY
244BPMAB AYC
244BPMDB AY
244BPACA AXC
244BPACA AXC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
244BPMCB AY
244BPMCB AYC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
244BPMBA AY
244BPMBA AYC
244BPMBB AY
244BPMBB AYC
244BPMCA AY
244BPMCA AYC
244BPMCA BYC
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
244BPMCB BYC
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
244BPMCC BYC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
244BPMAC AY
244BPMAC AYC
244BPMDC AY
244BPMCC AY
244BPMCC AYC
244BPMBC AY
244BPMBC AYC
244BPMAG AY
Version 15
Engine
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
Truck medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
Truck long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab short wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Van short wheelbase
Van short wheelbase
Van medium wheelbase
Van short wheelbase low roof automatic gearbox
Van short wheelbase high roof automatic gearbox
Van medium wheelbase low roof automatic gearbox
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244BPMAG AYC
244BPMDG AY
244BPMBG AY
244BPMBG AYC
244BPMHB AY
244BPMHB AYC
244BPMGB AY
244BPMHC AY
244BPMHC AYC
244BPMGC AY
244BPMAA BYC
244BPMBA BYC
244BPMAB BYC
244BPMBB BYC
244BPMAC BYC
244BPMBC BYC
244BPMAG BYC
244BPM BG BYC
244BPMFA AX
244BPMFA BX
244BPMFB AX
244BPAFA AX
244BPAFA BX
244BPAFB AX
244BPMNB AX
244BPMNB BX
244BPANB AX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
197
Version 15
Engine
Van high sided medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Van high sided long wheelbase
Van high sided long wheelbase
Van high sided long wheelbase automatic gearbox
Van high sided long wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab short wheelbase
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car
Truck short wheelbase
Chassis cab short wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Truck short wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab short wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cab medium wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cab long wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cab medium wheelbase
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car
Truck medium wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase special Camping car
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase special Camping car
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase special Camping car
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
198
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
code
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244BPANB BX
244BPMNC AX
244BPMNC BX
244BPANC AX
244BPANC BX
244BPMAA AX
244BPMAA AXC
244BPMDA AX
244BPAAA AX
244BPAAA AXC
244BPADA AX
244BPMAA BXC
244BPMAB BXC
244BPMAC BXC
244BPMAG BXC
244BPMAB AX
244BPMAB AXC
244BPMDB AX
244BPMCA AX
244BPMCA AXC
244BPMCA BXC
244BPMCB BXC
244BPMCC BXC
244BPMCB AX
244BPMCB AXC
244BPAAB AX
244BPAAB AXC
Version 15
Engine
Truck medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl short wheelbase
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cowl short wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cowl short wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl long wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cab long wheelbase
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car
Truck long wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab long wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Truck long wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase
Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl long wheelbase
Chassis cowl long wheelbase Camping Car
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244BPADB AX
244BPACB AX
244BPACB AXC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
244BPMBA AX
244BPMBA AXC
244BPMBA BXC
244BPABA AX
244BPABA AXC
244BPMBB AX
244BPMBB AXC
244BPMBB BXC
244BPABB AX
244BPABB AXC
244BPMBC BXC
244BPMAC AX
244BPMAC AXC
244BPMDC AX
244BPMSB AX
244BPMHB AX
244BPMHB AXC
244BPMCC AX
244BPMCC AXC
244BPAAC AX
244BPAAC AXC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
244BPADC AX
244BPACC AX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
199
Version 15
Engine
Engine
code
Bodywork
version
Chassis cowl long wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl long wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase Camping Car
Truck 4050 wheelbase
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Truck 4050 wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Aid ambulance medium wheelbase
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab
Truck 4050 wheelbase automatic gearbox
Truck 4050 wheelbase
Truck 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase crew cab
Truck 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab Camping Car
Truck medium wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
244BPACC AXC
244BPMBC AX
244BPMBC AXC
244BPABC AX
244BPABC AXC
244BPMAG AX
244BPMAG AXC
244BPMDG AX
244BPM BG BXC
244BPAAG AX
244BPAAG AXC
244BPADG AX
244BPMBG AX
244BPMBG AXC
244BPMHG AY
244BPMGG AY
244BPABG AX
244BPABG AXC
244BPMGB AX
244BPMHC AX
244BPMHC AXC
244BPMGC AX
244BPM TB AX
244BPMPB 14
244BPAPB 15
244BPMRB 16
244BPMRB 16B
200
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Version 15
Engine
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab Camping Car
Truck long wheelbase crew cab
Transport ambulance medium wheelbase
Panorama medium wheelbase
Panorama medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Panorama Autonomy
Combi 6 seater medium wheelbase
Combi 6 seater medium wheelbase
Combi 6 seater medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Combi 6 seater medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Combi medium wheelbase
Combi medium wheelbase high sided
Combi medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab short wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cowl short wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cab medium wheelbase special Camping Car
Combi medium wheelbase high sided automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase low roof
Camping Car Special automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase low roof
Camping Car Special automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase low roof
Camping Car Special automatic gearbox
Chassis cab short wheelbase special Camping car automatic gearbox
Chassis cab medium wheelbase low roof special
Camping car automatic gearbox
Chassis cab long wheelbase low roof special
Camping car automatic gearbox
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase special Camping car automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl short wheelbase special Camping car automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase low roof special
Camping car automatic gearbox
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244BPARB 17
244BPARB 17B
244BPMFB ZX
244BPMNB ZX
244BPAFB ZX
244BPAPA 32
244BPMAA BXC
244BPMBA BXC
244BPMAB BXC
244BPMHG AYC
244BPMHG AX
244BPMHG AXC
244BPADG AX
244BPMDG AX
244BPMDG AY
244BPMGG AX
244BPANB ZX
244BPACA BXC
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
244BPACB BXC
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
244BPACC BXC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
244BPAAA BXC
244BPAAB BXC
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
244BPAAC BXC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
244BPAAG BXC
244BPABA BXC
244BPABA BXC
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
201
Version 15
Engine
Chassis cowl long wheelbase low roof special
Camping car automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase special Camping car automatic gearbox
Van short wheelbase low roof without EGR
Van short wheelbase high roof without EGR
Van medium wheelbase low roof without EGR
Van medium wheelbase high sided without EGR
Van medium wheelbase extra high
Van long wheelbase high sided without EGR
Van long wheelbase extra high without EGR
Truck short wheelbase without EGR
Truck medium wheelbase without EGR
Truck long wheelbase without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Truck medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Truck long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
202
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244BPABA BXC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43S
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
244BPABA BXC
244BZMFA AY
244BZMFA BY
244BZMFB AY
244BZMNB AY
244BZMNB BY
244BZMNC AY
244BZMNC BY
244BZMDA AY
244BZMDB AY
244BZMDC AY
244BZMDG AY
244BZMGG AY
244BZMGB AY
244BZMGC AY
244BZMBA AY
244BZMBA AYC
244BZMBB AY
244BZMBB AYC
244BZMBC AY
244BZMBC AYC
244BZMBG AY
244BZMBG AYC
244BZMBA BYC
244BZMBB BYC
244BZMBC BYC
Engine
Bodywork
version
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
Engine
code
8140.43N
Chassis cowl short wheelbase special Camping car
(max weight 1850 kg front axle)
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMBA BYC1
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase special Camping car
(max weight 1850 kg front axle) without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMBB BYC1
Chassis cowl long wheelbase special Camping car
(max weight 1850 kg front axle)
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMBC BYC1
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase special Camping car
(max weight 1850 kg front axle)
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMBG BYC1
Chassis cab short wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAA AY
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAA AYC
Chassis cab medium wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAB AY
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAB AYC
Chassis cab long wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAC AY
244BZMAC AYC
Version 15
244BZMBG BYC
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAG AY
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAG AYC
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMHB AY
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMHB AYC
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMHC AY
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMHC AYC
Chassis cab short wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAA BYC
Chassis cab medium wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAB BYC
Chassis cab long wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAC BYC
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
203
Version 15
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase special Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab short wheelbase special Camping car
(max weight 1850 kg front axle) without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase special Camping car
(max weight 1850 kg front axle) without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase special Camping car
(max weight 1850 kg front axle) without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase special Camping car
(max weight 1850 kg front axle) without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase special
Camping car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase special
Camping car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase special
Camping car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase special Camping car
(max weight 1850 kg front axle) without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase special Camping car
(max weight 1850 kg front axle) without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase special Camping car
(max weight 1850 kg front axle) without EGR
204
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
Engine
code
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
Bodywork
version
244BZMAG BYC
244BZMHG AY
244BZMHG AYC
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAA BYC1
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAB BYC1
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMAC BYC1
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
8140.43N
244BZMAG BYC1
244BZMCB AY
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
8140.43N
244BZMCB AYC
244BZMCC AY
244BZMCC AYC
244BZMCA AY
244BZMCA AYC
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMCA BYC
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244BZMCB BYC
8140.43N
244BZMCC BYC
8140.43N
244BZMCA BYC1
8140.43N
244BZMCB BYC1
8140.43N
244BZMCC BYC1
Engine
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
2.8 JTD POWER
Version MAXI
Engine
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cab long wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cowl long wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase special Camping Car
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase special Camping Car
Van short wheelbase
Van short wheelbase
Van medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided long wheelbase
Van high sided long wheelbase
Truck medium wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab Camping Car
Chassis cab long wheelbase
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car
Truck long wheelbase
Chassis cab medium wheelbase
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab Camping Car
Truck medium wheelbase
Truck long wheelbase crew cab
Minibus long wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase Bipower
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
Engine
code
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
Bodywork
version
244BPMBB BXC
244BPMAC BXC
244BPMBC BXC
244BPMAG BXC
244BPM BG BXC
244CTMFA AX
244CTMFA BX
244CTMFB AX
244CTMNB AX
244CTMNB BX
244CTMNC AX
244CTMNC BX
244CTMGB AX
244CTMHB AX
244CTMHB AXC
244CTMAC AX
244CTMAC AXC
244CTMDC AX
244CTMA AX
244CTMA AXC
244CTMCC AX
244CTMCC AXC
244CTMCB AX
244CTMCB AXC
244CTMHC AX
244CTMHC AXC
244CMDB AX
244CTMGC AX
244CTMMC AX
244CTMNB AM
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
205
Version MAXI
Engine
Van high sided medium wheelbase Bipower (extra high)
Van high sided medium wheelbase petrol/LPG
Van high sided medium wheelbase petrol/LPG (extra high)
Van high sided long wheelbase Bipower
Van high sided long wheelbase Bipower (extra high)
Van high sided long wheelbase petrol/LPG
Van high sided long wheelbase petrol/LPG (extra high)
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided long wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase without EGR
206
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
Engine
code
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
RFL
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
Bodywork
version
244CTMNB BM
244CTMNB AG
244CTMNB BG
244CTMNC AM
244CTMNC BM
244CTMNC AG
244CTMNC BG
244CSMFA AY
244CSMFA BY
244CSMFB AY
244CSMNB AY
244CSMNB BY
244CSMNC AY
244CSMNC BY
244CSMAA AY
244CSMAA AYC
244CSMDA AY
244CSMCA AY
244CSMCA AYC
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
244CSMBA AY
244CSMBA AYC
244CSMAB AY
244CSMAB AYC
244CSMDB AY
244CSMCB AY
244CSMCB AYC
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
244CSMBB AY
244CSMBB AYC
244CSMAC AY
Version MAXI
Engine
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Truck medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
Truck long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Minibus long wheelbase without EGR
School bus (primary school) long wheelbase without EGR
School bus (secondary school) long wheelbase without EGR
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van short wheelbase without EGR
Van medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided medium wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided long wheelbase without EGR
Van high sided long wheelbase without EGR
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
F1AE0481C
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244CSMAC AYC
244CSMDC AY
244CSMCC AY
244CSMCC AYC
244CSMBC AY
244CSMBC AYC
244CSMAG AY
244CSMAG AYC
244CSMDG AY
244CSMBG AY
244CSMBG AYC
244CSMHB AY
244CSMHB AYC
244CSMHG AY
244CSMHG AYC
244CSMDG AY
244CSMGG AY
244CSMGB AY
244CSMHC AY
244CSMHC AYC
244CSMGC AY
244CSMMC AY
244CSMEC AY
244CSMLC AY
244CPMFA AY
244CPMFA BY
244CPMFB AY
244CPMNB AY
244CPMNB BY
244CPMNC AY
244CPMNC BY
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
207
Version MAXI
Engine
Chassis cab short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase
Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
208
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244CPMAA AY
244CPMAA AYC
244CPMDA AY
244CPMAB AY
244CPMAB AYC
244CPMDB AY
244CPACA AX
244CPACA AXC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
244CPMCA AX
244CPMCA AXC
244CPMCA AY
244CPMCA AYC
244CPMCB AY
244CPMCB AYC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
244CPMBA AY
244CPMBA AYC
244CPMBB AY
244CPMBB AYC
244CPMAC AY
244CPMAC AYC
244CPMDC AY
244CPMCC AY
244CPMCC AYC
244CPMBC AY
244CPMBC AYC
244CPMAG AY
244CPMAG AYC
244CPMDG AY
244CPMBG AY
244CPMDA AX
Version MAXI
Engine
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab
Truck 4050 wheelbase automatic gearbox
Truck 4050 wheelbase
Truck 4050 wheelbase without EGR
Truck 4050 wheelbase crew cab
Truck 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Truck medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
Truck long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
Minibus long wheelbase without EGR
School bus (primary school) long wheelbase without EGR
School bus (secondary school) long wheelbase without EGR
Van short wheelbase
Van short wheelbase
Van medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase
Van high sided medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Van high sided medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Van high sided long wheelbase
Van high sided long wheelbase
Van high sided long wheelbase automatic gearbox
Van high sided long wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab short wheelbase
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244CPMBG AYC
244CPMHB AY
244CPMHG AY
244CPMHG AYC
244CPMHG AX
244CPMHG AXC
244CPADG AX
244CPMDG AX
244CPMDG AY
244CPMGG AX
244CPMGG AY
244CPMHB AYC
244CPMGB AY
244CPMHC AY
244CPMHC AYC
244CPMGC AY
244CPMMC AY
244CPMEC AY
244CPMLC AY
244CPMFA AX
244CPMFA BX
244CPMFB AX
244CPMNB AX
244CPMNB BX
244CPANB AX
244CPANB BX
244CPMNC AX
244CPMNC BX
244CPANC AX
244CPANC BX
244CPMAA AX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
209
Version MAXI
Engine
Truck short wheelbase
Chassis cab short wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Truck short wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab medium wheelbase
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car
Truck medium wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Truck medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl short wheelbase
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cowl short wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cab long wheelbase
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car
Truck long wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cab long wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Truck long wheelbase automatic gearbox
210
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244CPMAA AXC
244CPAAA AX
244CPAAA AXC
244CPADA AX
244CPMAB AX
244CPMAB AXC
244CPMDB AX
244CPMCB AX
244CPMCB AXC
244CPAAB AX
244CPAAB AXC
244CPADB AX
244CPACB AX
244CPACB AXC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
244CPMBA AX
244CPMBA AXC
244CPABA AX
244CPABA AXC
244CPMBB AX
244CPMBB AXC
244CPABB AX
244CPABB AXC
244CPMAC AX
244CPMAC AXC
244CPMDC AX
244CPMCC AX
244CPMCC AXC
244CPAAC AX
244CPAAC AXC
244CPADC AX
Version MAXI
Engine
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase
Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl long wheelbase
Chassis cowl long wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cowl long wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl long wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase Camping Car
Truck 4050 wheelbase
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Truck 4050 wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase Camping Car
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase automatic gearbox
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase Camping Car automatic gearbox
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab Camping Car
Truck medium wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab Camping Car
Truck long wheelbase crew cab
Minibus long wheelbase
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
Engine
code
8140.43S
8140.43S
Bodywork
version
244CPACC AX
244CPACC AXC
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
8140.43S
244CPMBC AX
244CPMBC AXC
244CPABC AX
244CPABC AXC
244CPMAG AX
244CPMAG AXC
244CPMDG AX
244CPAAG AX
244CPAAG AXC
244CPADG AX
244CPMBG AX
244CPMBG AXC
244CPABG AX
244CPABG AXC
244CPMHB AX
244CPMHB AXC
244CPMGB AX
244CPMHC AX
244CPMHC AXC
244CPMGC AX
244CPMMC AX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
211
Bodywork
version
244CZMFA AY
Van short wheelbase low roof without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
Engine
code
8140.43N
Van short wheelbase high roof without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMFA BY
Van medium wheelbase low roof without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMFB BY
Van medium wheelbase high sided without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMNB AY
Van medium wheelbase extra high without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMNB BY
Minibus long wheelbase high sided without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMNC AY
Van long wheelbase extra high without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMNC BY
Truck short wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMDA AY
Truck medium wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMDB AY
Truck long wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMDC AY
Truck 4050 wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMDG AY
Truck 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMGG AY
Truck medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMGB AY
Truck long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMGC AY
Chassis cowl short wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMBA AY
Chassis cowl short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMBA AYC
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMBB AY
Chassis cowl medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMBA AYC
Chassis cowl long wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMBC AY
Chassis cowl long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMBC AYC
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMBG AY
Version MAXI
212
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Bodywork
version
244CZMBG AYC
Chassis cowl 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
Engine
code
8140.43N
Chassis cab short wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMAA AY
Chassis cab short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMAA AYC
Chassis cab medium wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMAB AY
Chassis cab medium wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMAB AYC
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMHB AY
Chassis cab medium wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMHB AYC
Chassis cab long wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMAC AY
Chassis cab long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMAC AYC
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMAG AY
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMAG AYC
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMHG AY
Chassis cab 4050 wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMHG AYC
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMHC AY
Chassis cab long wheelbase crew cab Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMHC AYC
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMCB AY
Chassis cab with load bed medium wheelbase
Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMCB AYC
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMCA AY
Chassis cab with load bed short wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMCA AYC
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMCC AY
Chassis cab with load bed long wheelbase Camping Car without EGR
2.8 JTD POWER
8140.43N
244CZMCC AYC
Version MAXI
Engine
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
213
ENGINE
2.0
GENERAL FEATURES
2.0 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD
POWER
Engine code
RFL
RHV
F1AE0481C
8140.43 S
8140.43 N
Cycle
Otto
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
Diameter x stroke
mm
86x86
85x88
88x94
94.4x100
94.4x100
Total capacity
cm3
1998
1997
2286
2800
2800
Number and layout of cylinders
9.5 : 1
17.6 : 1
19 : 1
18 : 1
18 : 1
Maximum power output EEC
corresponding ratio
kW
HP
rpm
81
110
5700
62
84
4000
81
110
3600
93.5
127
3600
107
146
3600
Maximum torque EEC
corresponding ratio
Nm
kgm
rpm
168
17.1
3700
192
19.6
1900
270
27.6
1800
300
30.6
1800
310
31.6
1500
Spark plugs
RC9YCC
RFC52LS
–
–
–
–
Fuel
Unleaded
petrol
95 RON
Diesel for
motor vehicles
(EN590
specifications)
Diesel for
motor vehicles
(EN590
specifications)
Diesel for
motor vehicles
(EN590
specifications)
Diesel for
motor vehicles
(EN590
specifications)
Compression ratio
214
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL SUPPLY/IGNITION
FUEL SUPPLY
SPARK PLUGS
Petrol version
JTD/JTD POWER versions
Electronic Multipoint sequential
phased integrated electronic injection
and ignition; a single injection system
controls both functions. It processes
both the time the injection lasts (for
fuel metering) and the ignition advance
angle.
UNIJET (Common Rail) electronic
control direct injection, turbosupercharger with WASTEGATE valve and
intercooler (2.3 JTD, 2.8 JTD and 2.8
JTD POWER versions).
The cleanness and soundness of the
spark plugs are very important for
keeping the engine efficient and polluting emissions down.
WARNING
Modifications or repairs to
the fuel feed system that
are not carried out properly or do
not take the system’s technical
specifications into account can
cause malfunctions leading to the
risk of fire.
The appearance of the spark plug, if
examined by an expert eyes, is a good
way of pinpointing a problem even if it
has nothing to do with the ignition system. Therefore, if the engine has problems, it is important to have the spark
plugs checked at a Fiat Dealership.
The spark plugs must be
changed at the times
specified in the SERVICE
SCHEDULE. Only use the type of
plugs indicated: if the heat ratio
is less than required or the life
specified is not guaranteed, problems can arise.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
215
BRAKES
SERVICE AND EMERGENCY
BRAKES
Front: disc, floating caliper with two
operating cylinders for each wheel and
pad wear warning light.
Rear: self-centring shoes and micrometric mechanism for clearance takeup.
Certain versions are fitted with rear
disc brakes with Drum in hat device
(i.e. drum on disc to block the vehicle
when parked with handbrake engaged).
Cross-over hydraulic circuit control.
Four sensors ABS system with EBD.
Automatic recovery of the friction
gasket wear; versions with rear disc
brake excluded (Drum in hat versions).
Lacking ABS system brakeforce distributor acting on rear brake hydraulic
circuit according to rear axle load.
216
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WARNING
Water, ice or salt on road
surfaces can deposit on
brake discs, reducing braking efficiency on the first braking.
TRANSMISSION
CLUTCH
Hydraulically controlled without
travel-free pedal.
MECHANICAL GEARBOX
AND DIFFERENTIAL
HANDBRAKE
Controlled by a lever, it works mechanically on the rear brake shoes.
For versions with rear disc brakes,
the handbrake works on the Drum in
hat device shoes.
IMPORTANT Pull the handbrake
lever only when the vehicle is at a
standstill, or when the vehicle is running, but however only in case of a
failure of the hydraulic system.
Should the handbrake be exceptionally used when the vehicle is running,
it is suggested to keep a moderate
traction to avoid causing the rear axle
block, entailing vehicle side skidding.
Five forward gears and reverse with
synchromesh for front gear engagement.
Cyclical gear reduction and differential assembly incorporated in the gearbox.
Drive transmission to the front
wheels by means of drive shafts connected to the differential assembly and
the wheels with CV joints.
ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC
GEARBOX
(2.8 JTD versions only)
SUSPENSIONS
Automatic gearbox with four speeds
plus reverse with self-adapting control
(i.e. capable of adapting to the driver’s
driving style), which transmits power
continuously and with very fast electro-hydraulic gear engagement times.
Independent wheel, McPherson suspension.
REAR
Rigid tubular axle type.
FRONT
Lengthways single blade (two-blades
as optional) leaf spring.
Telescopic dampers with flexible anchorage to the body and dust guards
on buffers.
Vertical shock absorbers anchored
above on the body (on the inside of
the wheelhouse) and down on the
axle flange.
Coil springs offset with shock absorbers and knock-guard buffers.
Knock-guard buffer fixed to the side
member.
Lower wishbone with twin taper
rubber bushing on chassis and ball
head on wheel stud.
Coupling for brake load proportioning.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
217
STEERING
WHEELS
Energy-absorbing jointed steering
column and wheel.
RIMS AND TYRES
Height adjustable steering wheel.
Permanently lubricated rack and pinion.
Hydraulic power steering.
Minimum turning circle:
– short wheelbase ................ 11 m
– medium wheelbase ............ 12.1 m
– long wheelbase .................. 13,7 m
Number of steering wheel turns lock
to lock......................................... 3.52
Printed steel rim.
Printed steel rims with ventilated
disk.
Tubeless tyres with radial carcass.
The homologated tyres are listed in
the log book.
IMPORTANT In the event of discrepancies between the information
provided in this Owner Handbook and
the Log Book, consider the specifications shown in the Log Book only.
To ensure safety of the vehicle in
movement, it must be fitted with tyres
of the same make and type on all
wheels.
WARNING
Do not hold the power assisted steering wheel with
the engine running for longer than
15 seconds. It will make a noise and
you could damage the system.
218
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPARE WHEEL
IMPORTANT Do not use inner
tubes with tubeless tyres.
Tubeless tyre (same as those fitted).
SNOW CHAINS
Only use low profile chains, see
“Snow chains”.
WHEEL GEOMETRY
Front wheel toe-in measured from
rim to rim: – 2 ± 1 mm.
The values refer to the vehicle in running order.
UNDERSTANDING TYRE
MARKINGS
Maximum speed rating
The following are the necessary indications to understand the meaning
of the markings on the tyre.
R
= up to 170 km/h.
S
= up to 180 km/h.
T
= up to 190 km/h.
U
= up to 200 km/h.
H
= up to 210 km/h.
V
= up to 240 km/h.
195
= Nominal width
(S, distance between side
walls in mm).
70
= Height/width ratio (H/S,
as a percentage).
R
= Radial tyre.
15
= Rim nominal diameter in
inches (Ø).
C
= Letter identifying tyres
for light-duty
transportation.
Q = up to 160 km/h.
The following are the necessary indications to understand the meaning
of the markings on the rim.
Example: 6J x 15 H2
Maximum speed rating
for snow tyres
Q M+S = up to 160 km/h
6
= rim in inches (1)
J
= rim drop centre outline
(side projection where the
tyre bead rests) (2)
15
= rim nominal diameter in
inches (corresponds to diameter of the tyre to be
mounted) (3 = Ø)
H2
= “hump” shape and number
(relief on the circumference holding the tubeless
tyre bead on the rim)
T M+S = up to 190 km/h
H M+S = up to 240 km/h
F0D0031m
Example: 195/70 R 15C 103/101 Q
UNDERSTANDING RIM
MARKINGS
103/101 = Load rating (carrying capacity).
Q
= Maximum speed rating.
fig. 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
219
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
Inflation pressure (bar)
Unladen and fully loaded
Front
Rear
Rim
Tyre
All types
6J x 15” - H2
195/70 R15C 103/101 Q
205/70 R15C 106/104 Q
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
Camping Car
6J x 15” - H2
215/70 R15C 109/107 Q Camping
5.0
5.0
All types (**)
6J x 15” - H2
205/70 R15C 106/104 Q
4.1
4.5
2.8 JTD POWER
6J x 15” - H2
205/70 R15C 106/104 R
4.1
4.5
6J x 15” - H2
215/70 R15C 109/107 Q Camping
5.0
5.0
All types (**)
6J x 16” - H2
205/75 R16C 110/108 Q
215/75 R16C 113/111 Q
4.5
4.5
4.5 (*)
4.5
2.8 JTD POWER
6J x 16” - H2
205/75 R16C 110/108 R
215/75 R16C 113/111 R
4.5
4.5
4.5 (*)
4.5
Camping Car
6J x 16” - H2
215/75 R16C 113/111 Q Camping
5.5
5.5
Version
11
15
Camping Car
MAXI
(*) 4.75 bar for vehicles with maximum admitted load on rear axle over 2000 kg.
(**) Except 2.8 JTD POWER versions
For warm tyres the pressure should be +0.3 bar in relation to the prescribed value.
Check again the correct pressure when the tyres are cold.
220
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Snow tyres
Inflation pressure (bar)
Unladen and fully loaded
Front
Rear
Rim
Tyre
All types
6J x 15” - H2
195/70 R15C 103/101 Q M+S
205/70 R15C 106/104 Q M+S
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
Camping Car
6J x 15” - H2
205/70 R15C 106/104 Q M+S
4.1
4.5
All types
6J x 15” - H2
205/70 R15C 106/104 Q M+S
4.1
4.5
2.8 JTD POWER
6J x 15” - H2
205/70 R15C 106/104 R M+S
4.1
4.5
6J x 15” - H2
205/70 R15C 106/104 Q M+S
4.1
4.5
Version
11
15
Camping Car
MAXI
All types
6J x 16” - H2
205/75 R16C 110/108 Q M+S
4.5
4.5 (*)
2.8 JTD POWER
6J x 16” - H2
205/75 R16C 106/104 R M+S
4.5
4.5
Camping Car
6J x 16” - H2
205/75 R16C 110/108 Q M+S
5.5
5.5
(*) 4.75 bar for vehicles with maximum admitted load on rear axle over 2000 kg.
For warm tyres the pressure should be +0.3 bar in relation to the prescribed value.
Check again the correct pressure when the tyres are cold.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
221
DIMENSIONS
VAN VERSION
Height is intended on an unladen vehicle.
F0D0272m
fig. 7
222
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
11
Versions
15
MAXI
Short
wheelbase
Medium
wheelbase
Short
wheelbase
Medium
wheelbase
Long
wheelbase
Short
wheelbase
Medium
wheelbase
Long
wheelbase
A
901
901
901
901
901
901
901
901
B
2850
3200
2850
3200
3700
2850
3200
3700
C
998
998
998
998
998
998
998
998
D
4749
5099
4749
5099
5599
4749
5099
5599
E
2150 ÷ 2470
2150 ÷ 2725
2150 ÷ 2470
2150 ÷ 2725
2470 ÷ 2860
2160 ÷ 2480
2160 ÷ 2735
2470 ÷ 2860
F
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
G
2024
2024
2024
2024
2024
2024
2024
2024
H
1441 ÷ 1760
1441 ÷ 1760
1441 ÷ 1760
1441 ÷ 2016
1441 ÷ 1760
1441 ÷ 1760
1441 ÷ 2016
1441 ÷ 1760
L
1710
1710
1710
1710
1710
1710
1710
1710
Dimensions vary according to the version, within the limits indicated above.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
223
TRUCK VERSION
Height is intended on an unladen vehicle.
F0D0273m
fig. 8
224
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Versions
11
15
MAXI
Short
wheelbase
Short
wheelbase
Medium
wheelbase
Long
wheelbase
4050
wheelbase
medium
wheelbase
Long
wheelbase
4050
wheelbase
A
901
901
901
901
901
901
901
901
B
2850
2850
3200
3700
4050
3200
3700
4050
C
1080
1080
1080
1080
1029
1080
1080
1029
D
4831
4831
5181
5681
5980
5181
5681
5980
E
2517
2517
2867
3367
3670
2867
3367
3670
F
2100
2100
2100
2100
2100
2125
2125
2125
G
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
H
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
1720
L (*)
1932
1932
1932
1932
2040
1932
1932
2040
Dimensions vary according to the version, within the limits indicated above
(*) 2180 mm width optional body can be provided.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
225
PERFORMANCE
Top speeds allowable after running in kph
Versions/engines
11-2.0
11-2.0 JTD
11-2.3 JTD
11-2.8 JTD
15-2.0
15-2.0 JTD
144 (*)
136 (*)
149 (*)
152 (*)
144 (*)
136 (*)
135 (**)
128 (**)
145 (**)
148 (**)
135 (**)
128 (**)
* All Van versions-According to the specific version
** All Truck versions
Versions/engines
15
2.3 JTD
15
2.8 JTD
15
2.8 JTD
POWER
MAXI
2.0
MAXI
2.3 JTD
MAXI
2.8 JTD
MAXI
2.8 JTD
POWER
149 (*)
152 (*)
159
136 (*)
147 (*)
152 (*)
159
145 (**)
148 (**)
152 (❐)
128 (**)
143 (**)
148 (**)
152 (❐)
* All Van versions-According to the specific version
** All Truck versions
(❐) If Camping Car tyres are fitted
226
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VAN WEIGHTS
Weights (kg)
Version 11 (*)
2.0
2.0 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
Kerb weight
(including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
1695 ÷ 1780
1755 ÷ 1840
1825 ÷ 1910
1850 ÷ 1935
Payload including
driver (1):
1120 ÷ 1170
1060 ÷ 1145
990 ÷ 1075
965 ÷ 1050
Maximum admitted
loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
1600
1600
2865 ÷ 2900
1600
1600
2900
1600
1600
2900
1600
1600
2900
2000
750
1600
750
2000
750
2000
750
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
80
80
80
80
Maximum load on roof
100
100
100
100
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
* The figures given refer to panelled and glazed vans with medium and short wheelbase, both high and low sided.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
227
Weights (kg)
Version 15 (*)
2.0
2.0 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD POWER
Kerb weight
(including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
1695 ÷ 1865
1755 ÷ 1840
1725 ÷ 1995
1850 ÷ 2020
Payload including driver (1):
1435 ÷ 1510
1435 ÷ 1505
1305 ÷ 1475
1280 ÷ 1450
Maximum admitted
loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
1750
1850
3245 ÷ 3300
1750
1850
3300
1750
1850
3300
1750
1850
3300
2000
750
1600
750
2000
750
2000
750
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
80
80
80
80
Maximum load on roof
100
100
100
100
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
* The figures given refer to panelled and glazed vans with long, medium and short wheelbase, both high and low sided.
228
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.0
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD POWER
Kerb weight
(including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
1765 ÷ 1915
1895 ÷ 2045
1935 ÷ 2070
Payload including driver (1):
1585 ÷ 1735
1455 ÷ 1605
1430 ÷ 1565
Maximum admitted
loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle (3):
– total:
1850
2120
3500
1850
2120
3500
1850
2120
3500
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
2000
750
2000
750
2000
750
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
80
80
80
Maximum load on roof
100
100
100
Weights (kg)
Version MAXI (*)
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
(3) See “Cold tyre inflation pressure”.
* The figures given refer to panelled and glazed vans with long and medium wheelbase, both high and low sided.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
229
PANORAMA WEIGHTS
Weights (kg)
Short wheelbase version
2.0
2.0 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
Kerb weight
(including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
1925
1985
2055
2080
8P + 431 kg
8P + 371 kg
8P + 301 kg
8P + 276 kg
Maximum admitted
loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
1600
1600
2900
1600
1600
2900
1600
1600
2900
1600
1600
2900
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
2000
750
1600
750
2000
750
2000
750
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
80
80
80
80
Maximum load on roof
100
100
100
100
Payload including driver (1):
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
230
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Weights (kg)
Medium wheelbase version
GRAND VOLUME
2.0
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
Kerb weight
(including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
2065
2195
2220
8P + 691 kg
8P + 561 kg
8P + 536 kg
Maximum admitted
loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
1750
1850
3300
1750
1850
3300
1750
1850
3300
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
2000
750
2000
750
2000
750
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
80
80
80
Maximum load on roof
100
100
100
Payload including driver (1):
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
231
COMBI WEIGHTS
Weights (kg)
Short wheelbase version
2.0
2.0 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
Kerb weight
(including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
1805
1865
1935 ÷2010
1960 ÷ 2035
5P + 755 kg
5P + 695 Kg
5P +625 ÷ 515 kg
5P +600 ÷ 490 kg
Maximum admitted
loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
1600
1600
2900
1600
1600
2900
1600
1600
2900
1600
1600
2900
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
2000
750
1600
750
2000
750
2000
750
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
80
80
80
80
Maximum load on roof
100
100
100
100
Payload including driver (1):
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
232
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Weights (kg)
Medium wheelbase version
2.0
2.0 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
Kerb weight
(including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
1845
1905
1975 ÷ 2050
2000 ÷ 2075
5P + 1115 kg
5P + 1055 kg
5P +985 ÷ 875 kg
5P +960 ÷ 850 kg
Maximum admitted
loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
1750
1850
3300
1750
1850
3300
1750
1850
3300
1750
1850
3300
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
2000
750
1600
750
2000
750
2000
750
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
80
80
80
80
Maximum load on roof
100
100
100
100
Payload including driver (1):
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
233
Weights (kg)
GRAND VOLUME
2.0
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
Kerb weight
(including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
1945
2075 ÷ 2150
2100 ÷ 2175
Payload including
driver (1):
5P + 1015 kg
5P + 885 ÷ 775 kg
5P + 860 ÷ 750 kg
Maximum admitted
loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
1750
1850
3300
1750
1850
3300
1750
1850
3300
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
2000
750
2000
750
2000
750
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
80
80
80
Maximum load on roof
100
100
100
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
234
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TRUCK WEIGHTS
Weights (kg)
Version 11
Kerb weight
(including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
2.0 JTD
1780 ÷ 1815
1085 ÷ 1105
Payload including driver (1):
Maximum admitted
loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
1600
1600
2885 ÷ 2900
1600
750
80
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
235
Weights (kg)
Version 15
2.0
2.0 JTD
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD POWER
Kerb weight
(including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
1795
1780 ÷ 1855
1850 ÷ 1985
1875 ÷ 2010
Payload including driver (1):
1505
1375 ÷ 1445
1315 ÷ 1415
1290 ÷ 1390
Maximum admitted
loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
1750
1850
3300
1750
1850
3250 ÷ 3300
1750
1850
3230 ÷ 3300
1750
1850
3260 ÷ 3300
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
2000
750
1600
750
2000
750
2000
750
80
80
80
80
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
236
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Weights (kg)
Version MAXI
2.0
2.3 JTD
2.8 JTD - 2.8 JTD POWER
Kerb weight
(including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
1845
1900 ÷ 2035
1925 ÷ 2060
Payload including driver (1):
1655
1465 ÷ 1600
1440 ÷ 1575
Maximum admitted
loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle (3):
– total:
1850
2120
3500
1850
2120
3500
1850
2120
3500
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
2000
750
2000
750
2000
750
80
80
80
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
(3) See “Cold tyre inflation pressure”.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
237
CREW CAB TRUCK WEIGHTS
15
2.3 JTD
15
2.8 JTD
MAXI
2.0
MAXI
2.3 JTD
MAXI
2.8 JTD
2.8 JTD POWER
Kerb weight (including fuel,
spare wheel, tools
and accessories):
1990 ÷ 2055
2015 ÷ 2080
1950
2040 ÷ 2105
2065 ÷ 2130
Payload including driver (1):
970 ÷ 1310
945 ÷ 1285
1250
1120 ÷ 1460
1095 ÷ 1435
Maximum admitted loads (2)
– front axle:
– rear axle:
– total:
1750
1850
3300
1750
1850
3300
1850
2120 (3)
3500
1850
2120 (3)
3500
1850
2120 (3)
3500
Towable weight:
– trailer with brakes
– trailer without brakes
2000
750
2000
750
2000
750
2000
750
2000
750
80
80
80
80
80
Weights (kg)
Maximum load on ball coupling
(trailer with brakes)
(1) If special equipment is fitted (tow hitch, etc.), the unladen vehicle weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload.
(2) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads so that they comply with these limits.
(3) See “Cold tyre inflation pressure”.
238
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAPACITIES
2000 BZ
Prescribed fuel
Recommended products
Litres
kg
Fuel tank:
including a reserve of:
80
8 ÷ 10
–
–
Premium unleaded petrol with
a RON not lower than 95
Engine cooling system:
9
–
Mixture of distilled water and
PARAFLU 11 (blue) at 50% or
PARAFLU UP (red) at 50%
Engine sump:
5
4.5
SELENIA 20K (▲)
Transaxle:
2.4
2.16
TUTELA CAR MATRYX
Hydraulic power steering:
1.3
–
TUTELA GI/A
Front and rear hydraulic brake circuit:
11-15 versions
MAXI versions
0.59
0.62
–
–
TUTELA TOP 4
Hydraulic brake circuit
with ABS:
11-15 versions
MAXI versions
0.62
0.66
–
–
TUTELA TOP 4
Windscreen and rear window
liquid reservoir:
4.2
–
Mixture of water and TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35
(▲) For particularly cold temperatures use SELENIA PERFORMER MULTIPOWER SAE 5W-30.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
239
2000 JTD
Fuel tank:
including a reserve of:
Engine cooling
system:
2300 JTD
Litres
kg
Litres
kg
80
8 ÷ 10
–
80
8 ÷10
–
9
–
10
–
2800 JTD 2800 JTD POWER
kg
Litres
80
8 ÷10
10
Prescribed fuel
Recommended products
–
Diesel fuel for motor vehicles
(EN590 specifications)
–
Mixture of distilled water and
PARAFLU 11 (blue) at 50% or
PARAFLU UP (red) at 50%
SELENIA WR
–
6.25
–
5.6
5.8
6.3
5.2
5.7
5.0
5.7
4.5
5.1
2.7
2.43
2.7
2.43
2.7
2.43
–
–
–
–
8.2
–
TUTELA HP 20
Hydraulic power steering:
1.3
–
1.3
–
1.3
–
TUTELA GI/A
Front and rear hydraulic
brake circuit:
11-15 versions
MAXI versions
0.59
0.62
–
–
0.59
0.62
–
–
0.59
0.62
–
–
TUTELA TOP 4
Hydraulic brake circuit
with ABS:
11-15 versions
MAXI versions
0.59
0.62
–
–
0.59
0.62
–
–
0.59
0.62
–
–
Windscreen and rear window
liquid reservoir:
4.2
–
4.2
–
4.2
–
Engine sump:
Engine sump and filter:
TUTELA CAR MATRYX
Transaxle:
Automatic gearbox
240
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TUTELA TOP 4
Mixture of water and TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
PRODUCTS WHICH MAY BE USED AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS
Fluid and lubricant specifications
for correct vehicle operations
Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 10W-40 that passes
Lubricants
Recommended
fluids and lubricants
Applications
SELENIA 20K
F0D0146m
Use
ACEA A3, API SL specifications
for petrol
engines (❐)
Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 5W-30 that passes
SELENIA
ACEA A1, ACEA A5, API SL and FIAT 9.55535
PERFORMER
specifications.
MULTIPOWER
Lubricants
Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 5W-40 that passes ACEA B4,
for diesel
API CF and FIAT 9.55535 specifications
SELENIA WR
engines
(❐) For particularly cold temperatures use SELENIA PERFORMER MULTIPOWER SAE 5W-30
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
241
Fluid and lubricant specifications
for correct vehicle operation
Use
Recommended
fluids and lubricants
Fully synthetic lubricant SAE 75W-85 meeting API GL-4,
FIAT 9.55550
TUTELA CAR
MATRYX
Mechanical
transaxles developping
high temperatures
Lubricant for transmissions with ATF DEXRON II D LEV
properties
TUTELA GI/A
Power steering system
ATF DEXRON III oil type
TUTELA HP 20
Automatic gearbox
Lubricant, grade SAE 80W-90 that passes API GL5, MIL-L2105 D, IVECO 18-1804, FIAT 9.55550 and FIAT 9.55523
specifications
TUTELA
W 90/M-DA
EP oil for standard and
self-locking differentials
Synthetic fluid, FMVSS n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925,
SAE J-1704, CUNA NC 956 - 01
TUTELA TOP 4
Hydraulic brake and
clutch controls
Protective with antifreeze action based on
inhibited monoethylen glycol, CUNA NC 956-16
PARAFLU 11 (*)
Lubricants and grease
for transmission
Products for brakes
Radiator
antifreeze
Applications
Protective with antifreeze action (red colour) based on inhibited monoethylen glycol, with O.A.T. formulation, that passes
CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.
or
PARAFLU UP (*)
Cooling circuits.
Proportion: 50% down
to -35° C Not to be
mixed with products
having different
formulas.
Diesel fuel
additive
Diesel fuel additive providing diesel engine protection
DIESEL MIX
To be mixed with
diesel fuel
(25 cc every 10 litres)
Windscreen/
rear window/
headlight washer fluid
Mixture of alcohol and surfactants CUNA NC 956 -II
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL
SC 35
To be used pure
or diluted
(*) IMPORTANT These two fluids cannot be mixed with each other. Contact Fiat Dealership for topping up.
242
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL CONSUMPTION - CO2 EMISSIONS
RUNNING AND USE CONDITIONS AFFECTING FUEL CONSUMPTION
(examples and differences with respect to goods transportation vehicle data)
IMPORTANT
Although fuel consumption measurements procedure aim at defining
realistic values, fuel consumption is influenced by factors such as:
Driving style and vehicle use high
speed, frequent acceleration, frequent
gear shifting, door-to-door deliveries,
etc.
Just for passenger transportation
versions with 2.3 and 2.8 JTD engines,
reduced consumption can be obtained
by starting (on level road) in 2nd gear
instead of 1st gear.
Traffic and road conditions
queues, bending roads, steep roads,
bad road surface, etc.
Weather conditions and temperatures
low temperatures, thinner air, wind,
rain etc…;
Vehicle conditions
Poor maintenance (tyre pressure, filters, spark plugs, etc.), damaged bodywork
Load conditions
Heavy weights, not optimal load distribution, large weights on roof rack,
etc.
Use of electric devices
Climate control, heater and electric
devices in general
Special conditions of use
Special vehicle conditions of use: roof
rack, trailer, open side windows, type
of tyres, etc.
Special trim and adaptations
caravan, motor home, mega box, canvas cover, etc.
Some of these conditions are illustrated in these figures on the next
pages.
For more information, refer to the
advice in the chapter “Cheap running
that respects the environment.
The fuel consumption values shown
in the table in following pages were defined according to the type-approval
specifications in European Directives.
Consumption values are defined by
means of the following procedures:
– an urban cycle: consisting of a
cold start and a simulated drive in city
streets;
– an extra-urban cycle: consisting
in frequent accelerations, in all gears,
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
243
simulating normal conditions of use.
Speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h;
– average combined cycle consisting of 37% urban cycle and 63% extra-urban cycle.
IMPORTANT Road and traffic
conditions, weather, general conditions of the vehicle, driving
Consumption according to Directive
99/100/EC (litres/100 km)
style, fittings and accessories, use
of the climate control system,
load, roof racks and other situations penalising aerodynamic
penetration and effecting rolling
resistance will influence fuel consumption rates which can be different from the values shown in
the table (see “Cheap running
that respects the environment”
in “Driving your car” chapter).
CO2 EMISSIONS AT EXHAUST
The maximum CO2 emission values
shown in the following table refer to
the average combined cycle.
Urban
Extra-urban
Combined
CO2 emissions at exhaust
according to Directive
99/100/EC (g/km)
Engine 2.0
Version 11
Panorama short wheelbase
Combi short wheelbase
Panorama short wheelbase 4x4
16.1
15.9
16,3
11.2
11.0
11.4
13.0
12.8
13.2
306
301
311
Version 15
Combi medium wheelbase
Combi medium wheelbase
high sided
Panorama medium wheelbase
Combi short wheelbase 4x4
Combi medium wheelbase 4x4
15.9
11.0
12.8
301
16.1
16.3
16.1
16.1
11.2
11.4
11.2
11.2
13.0
13.2
13.0
13.0
306
311
306
306
Engine 2.0 JTD
Version 11
Panorama short wheelbase
Combi short wheelbase
10.6
10.2
8.1
7.8
9.0
8.7
239
230
Version 15
Combi medium wheelbase
10.6
8.1
9.0
239
244
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Consumption according to Directive
99/100/EC (litres/100 km)
Urban
Extra-urban
Combined
CO2 emissions at exhaust
according to Directive
99/100/EC (g/km)
Engine 2.3 JTD (*)
Version 11
Panorama short wheelbase
Combi short wheelbase
9.0
8.7
7.7
7.3
8.1
7.8
216
208
Version 15
Combi medium wheelbase
Combi medium wheelbase high sided
Panorama medium wheelbase
8.7
9.0
9.2
7.3
7.7
8.0
7.8
8.1
8.4
208
216
223
10.9
8.8
9.6
234
13.7
10.6
11.1
10.0
8.5
9.0
11.3
9.3
9.8
301
246
261
10.6
10.9
8.5
8.8
9.3
9.6
246
234
13.4
9.8
11.1
295
13.7
11.1
10.0
9.0
11.3
9.8
301
261
13.9
10.9
11.1
10.2
8.8
9.0
11.5
9.6
9.8
307
234
261
Engine 2.8 JTD (*)
Version 11
Version 15
Panorama short wheelbase
Panorama short wheelbase
automatic gearbox
Combi short wheelbase
Panorama short wheelbase 4x4
Combi medium wheelbase
Combi medium wheelbase high sided
Combi medium wheelbase
automatic gearbox
Combi medium wheelbase high sided
automatic gearbox
Panorama medium wheelbase
Panorama medium wheelbase
automatic gearbox
Combi short wheelbase 4x4
Combi medium wheelbase 4x4
(*) Test was performed with start-up in second gear.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
245
Roof rack or side
windows half open
+35÷45%
Town driving
+5%
Climate control on
+10÷15%
Mountain driving
+10÷15%
Caravan or other
adaptations
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
F0D0197m
F0D0195m
246
F0D0194m
+5%
F0D0196m
F0D0199m
Max. speed (accelerator pedal fully down)
F0D0198m
+80÷100%
INDEX
ABS ..............................................
Additional heater ........................
Adjusting the headlight beam ...
Airbags (front and side) .............
Air cleaner ....................................
Air vents ........................................
Annual inspection schedule ......
Ashtray ..........................................
ASR system ...................................
At the filling station ....................
Automatic electronic gearbox ..
Battery ........................................
88
58
86
90
173
54
165
77
96
102
110
174
- battery cut out ....................... 73
- checking the charge ............... 175
- jump starting .................... 136-157
- recharging ................................ 157
- replacement ............................ 174
- useful advice ............................ 175
Bodywork ..................................... 181
- maintenance ............................ 181
- tips for keeping the body
in good conditions ................. 182
- versions .................................... 187
- warranty ................................... 182
Bodywork paint identification
plate ............................................. 186
Bodywork versions ..................... 187
Bonnet ........................................... 84
Bottle holder ................................ 74
Brake fluid level ........................... 172
Brake light replacement ............. 146
Brakes
- handbrake ......................... 108-216
- service and
emergency brake ................... 216
Bulb replacement ........................ 141
Bulb types ..................................... 142
Bump starting ............................... 137
Capacities
...................................
Ceiling light ....................................
Cellular phone set-up ................
Central door locking system ....
Changing a wheel ........................
Cheap running that respects
the environment .......................
Checking fluid levels ...................
Child restraint systems ..............
Cigar lighter .................................
Cleaning seats and fabrics .........
Cleaning the plastic parts ..........
Climate control system .............
Clutch ............................................
Controls ........................................
Consumption
- engine oil ..................................
- fuel .............................................
Coolant temperature gauge .....
INDEX
239
71
100
83
137
127
167
22
77
184
184
57
216
71
170
243
30
247
Cruise Control ............................
68
Current socket ............................
76
Dashboard .................................
5
Demisting ......................................
56
Diesel fuel filter ........................... 173
Differential .................................... 216
Digital clock ..................................
32
Dimensions ........................... 222-224
Dipped beam headlights ............
65
- bulb replacement ................... 143
Direction indicators ...................
66
- front bulb replacement ......... 145
- rear bulb replacement .......... 146
- side bulb replacement ........... 145
Doors ............................................
79
- 270° opening ...........................
82
- central door locking ..............
83
- driver’s cab doors ..................
79
- rear door .................................
81
- remote control .......................
9
248
INDEX
- side sliding door ..................... 80
- window regulators ................ 83
Driving style affecting fuel
consumption .............................. 124
Electric windows .......................
83
Electronic alarm .......................... 11
Electronic automatic gearbox .. 110
Electronic control units ............. 177
- speed limiter ........................... 177
Emergency starting .............. 107-135
Emission control devices ........... 128
Engine ............................................ 214
- starting diesel engines ........... 106
- starting petrol engines .......... 105
- stopping the engine ............... 108
- supply/ignition ......................... 215
- warming up the engine ......... 107
Engine/bodywork codes ............ 187
Engine compartment .................. 183
Engine coolant gauge .................. 30
Engine coolant level .................... 170
Engine marking ............................
Engine oil .......................................
- consumption ...........................
Engine oil level .............................
Engine oil level gauge .................
EOBD system ..............................
185
169
170
169
32
95
Fiat Code (system) ...................
7
First aid kit .................................... 161
Flashing the headlights ............... 66
Fluids and lubricants ................... 241
Front/rear ceiling light
replacement ............................... 148
Front fog light replacement ...... 145
Fuel cut-off switch ...................... 72
Fuel gauge ..................................... 31
Fuses (replacement) ................... 149
Getting to know
your vehicle ............................
5
Getting the best out of
your vehicle ............................ 105
Glove compartment/oddment
compartment .............................
73
Headlight washer ......................
181
Headlights
- beam adjustment .................... 86
Head restraints ............................ 50
Heat flange .................................... 106
Heating .......................................... 56
Heating and ventilation .............. 54
Identification data ......................
185
If a bulb burns out ...................... 141
If an accident occurs .................. 160
If anyone is injured
(during accidents) ..................... 161
If an exterior light burns out ... 143
If an interior light burns out .... 148
Ignition switch ............................. 28
In an emergency ..................... 135
Individual settings ........................ 42
Instrument panel ......................... 29
Instruments ..................................
30
Object holder/
Interior equipment .....................
73
Interiors ........................................ 184
food box .....................................
Oddment compartments............
Odometer......................................
Jacking the vehicle ....................
Paintwork....................................
158
Jump starting ........................... 136-157
Keys ............................................
7
Load recommendations ..........
126
Main beam headlights ............
65
- bulb replacement ................... 143
Manual gearbox ........................... 109
Mobile foot board .......................
80
Model plate ................................... 185
Multimeter ....................................
78
Number plate light
replacement ............................... 147
Parking ............................................
Parking sensors.............................
Performance ..................................
Pollen filter ....................................
Power steering fluid level...........
Pretensioners ................................
Protecting the environment ......
75
73
31
182
108
67
226
173
171
18
104
Radio transmitters
and cellular phones .................. 101
Reading/writing desk .................. 74
Rear fog light replacement ....... 145
Rearview camera ........................ 67
Rearview mirrors ................ 51-52
Recharging the battery .............. 157
Remote control ...........................
9
INDEX
249
Rev counter .................................
30
98
Steering column stalks ...............
65
Reversing light replacement ..... 146
- aerial ......................................... 100
Steering wheel .............................
51
Rims
- heavy set-up ............................
98
Sun visors ......................................
78
- light set-up ...............................
98
Suspensions .................................. 217
- understanding rim markings .. 219
Sound system ...............................
Roof rack/ski rack (presetting) .. 101
Spare wheel .................................. 218
Rubber tubing .............................. 179
Spark plugs .................................... 215
Symbols .........................................
7
Speed limiter ................................ 177
Tank cap................................
Speedometer ................................
30
Technical specifications ........ 185
Scheduled Service ....................... 162
Spray nozzles ............................... 181
Seat belts .......................................
15
Starting the engine ...................... 105
Third brake light
replacement ................................. 146
Seats ...............................................
42
- bump starting .......................... 137
Tools ................................................ 138
- Diesel engine procedure ...... 106
Top speeds ..................................... 226
28
Tow hitch
(fitting diagrams)................... 130-131
Service Schedule .......................... 163
- jump starting .................... 136-157
Tow hitch installation .................. 129
Side central windows (opening)
78
- petrol engine procedure ...... 105
Towing a trailer ............................. 129
Side/taillights .................................
65
- stopping the engine ................ 108
Towing the vehicle ....................... 159
- front bulb replacement ......... 146
Transmission .................................. 216
67
- warming up the engine after
it has just started ................... 107
Snow chains .......................... 133-218
Steering ......................................... 218
Tyre pressure ................................. 220
Snow tyres ............................ 132-221
Steering column lock ..................
Tyres ......................................... 178-220
Safe driving..................................
119
Self-standing supplementary
heater ..........................................
59
- emergency starting ......... 107-135
Service indicator ..........................
33
- ignition switch .........................
Smart wash ...................................
250
INDEX
28
99-103
Transporting children in safety ..
22
Understanding rim markings ...
219
Understanding tyre markings ... 219
Using the automatic gearbox ... 110
Using the manual gearbox ........ 109
Vehicle maintenance ...........
162
Vehicle storage ............................. 134
Ventilation......................................
56
Warming up the engine
- understanding tyre
markings ................................... 219
- wheel geometry ..................... 218
Windows ...................................... 183
Windscreen washer ............ 66-181
Windscreen washer
fluid level .................................... 171
Windscreen
wiper (blades) ..................... 66-180
Writing/reading desk ................. 74
after it has just started ............. 107
Warning lights .............................
35
Washing the vehicle ................... 182
Weights ......................................... 227
Wheel geometry ......................... 218
Wheels and tyres ........................ 178
- changing a wheel .................... 137
- inflation pressure ................... 220
- snow chains ............................ 133
- snow tyres .............................. 132
- spare wheel ............................. 218
INDEX
251
NOTES
252
INDEX
INDEX
253
®
®
Always ask your mechanic for
Oil change? The experts reccomend Selenia.
The engine of your car is factory filled with Selenia,
a range of lubricants which satisfies the most advanced
international specifications. Specific tests and high technical
characteristicss allow the Selenia range to guarantee
the optimum and top quality performance of your engine.
The Selenia range includes a number of of technologically advanced products:
SELENIA 20K
API SL lubricant ,which guarantees optimum
performance and maximum wear protection to
aspirated, turbocharged or multivalve petrol engines.
SELENIA TD
Oil for aspirated turbocharged or multivalve diesel
engines, guarantees maximum engine cleanliness
and stability at high temperatures.
SELENIA PERFORMER
Is particularly ideal for the protection of new
generation petrol engines,
Very effective even in the most severe weather
conditions. It guaranteees a reduction in fuel
consumption (Energy conserving ).
SELENIA WR
Oil which has been specifically designed for use in
common rail andMultijet diesel engines. Effective during cold starts it offers maximim wear protection,
hydraulic tappets control, consumption reduction
and stability at high temperatures.
The complete Selenia range also includes Selenia 20K Alfa Romeo, Selenia Performer 5W-40, Selenia Racing and Selenia Digitech.
For further information on Selenia products, please visit the website www.flselenia.com.
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)
Version
11
15
MAXI
Unladen and fully loaded
Front
Rear
Tyre
All types
Camping Car
All types
Camping Car
All types
Camping Car
195/70 R15C (103/101) Q
205/70 R15C (106/104) Q
215/70 R15C (109/107) Q Camping
205/70 R15C (106/104) Q/205/70 R15C (106/104) R (**)
215/70 R15C (109/107) Q Camping
205/75 R16C (110/108) Q/205/75 R16C (110/108) R (**)
215/75 R16C (113/111) Q/215/75 R16C (113/111) R (**)
215/75 R16C (113/111) Q Camping
(*) 4.75 bar for vehicles with maximum admitted load on rear axle over 2000 kg.
For warm tyres the pressure should be +0.3 bar in relation to the prescribed value.
Check again the correct pressure when the tyres are cold.
4.0
4.0
5.0
4.1
5.0
4.5
4.5
5.5
4.0
4.0
5.0
4.5
5.0
4.5 (*)
4.5
5.5
(**) 2.8 JTD POWER versions
ENGINE OIL CHANGE
2.0 petrol
Engine sump
Engine sump and filter
2.3 JTD
2.0 JTD
litres
kg
litres
kg
litres
kg
5
–
4.5
–
–
6.25
–
5.6
5.8
6.3
5.2
5.7
FUEL CAPACITIES (litres)
For all engine types
Tank capacity........................................................................ litres 80
Reserve .................................................................................. litres 8 ÷ 10
Refuel petrol engines with unleaded petrol with an octane rating (RON) no lower than 95 only.
Refuel diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles (EN590 specifications) only.
Fiat Auto S.p.A.
After Sales - Assistenza Tecnica - Ingegneria Assistenziale
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)
Print no. 603.45.862 - IV/2005 - 3rd edition
2.8 JTD - 2.8 JTD
POWER
litres
kg
5.0
5.7
4.5
5.1
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising